: 
 
 
 
INTRODUCTORY BOOK 
 
 TO 
 
 OLLENDORFF'S NEW METHOD OF LEARNING TO READ, 
 WRITE, AND SPEAK A LANGUAGE IN SIX MONTHS, 
 
 ADAPTED TO 
 
 THE GERMAN; 
 
 CONTAINING, ALSO, 
 
 A DEFINITION OF ALL THE GERMAN DECLENSIONS, 
 
 AND 
 
 RULES ON THE GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES: 
 FOR THE USE OF SCHOOLS AND PRIVATE TEACHERS." 
 
 by 
 
 H. G. OLLENDORFF, 
 
 PROFESSOR OF GERMAN LITERATURE. 
 
 SECOND EDITION, 
 
 CAREFULLY REVISED AND CORRECTED. 
 
 1— — - ■ • ■ 
 
 LONDON: 
 
 
 DULAU AND CO. SOHO SQUARE; 
 AND WHITTAKER AND CO. AVE MARIA LANK 
 
 1844. 
 
.A 
 
 * 
 
 ENTERED AT STATIONERS' HALL. 
 
 %* To warn the public against the many spurious, incorrect, and in- 
 complete editions which have been published abroad of Mr. Ollendorff's 
 works, it is necessary to notice that each copy has its number and the 
 Author's signature. 
 
 {■■■ '^* 
 
 Gilbert & Rivington, Printers, St. John's Square, London. 
 
rf© 
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 7o 
 
 It is well known that no grammarian has yet given 
 fixed rules on the German declension. Some have 
 given four declensions, some five, some seven, and some 
 have even gone as far as nine ; but all of them have 
 only embarrassed the learner, and, instead of encou- 
 raging his endeavours, they have, by the inextricable 
 difficulties of their declensions, only contributed to dis- 
 gust him, and very often to make him give up his 
 pursuit at the very beginning. 
 
 Long and constant meditations on the subject, and 
 many years' experience in teaching, have enabled me to 
 discover the clear and simple rules which I now present 
 to the public, as well as the rules on the gender of 
 German substantives — rules, the difficulties of which 
 have hitherto checked the efforts of all grammarians 
 who attempted to write on the subject. I have reduced 
 them to three simple rules : and, proceeding on the 
 same principle, I have equally established three rules 
 a2 
 
for the declension of all the different German adjectives 
 and pronouns, which, by complete and numerous ex- 
 amples, I hope to have made so clear that even a child, 
 however little advanced, will easily understand and be 
 able to apply them after a short practice. 
 
 The reason why the English have thought the study 
 of the German language so difficult, is, that the gram- 
 mars which they have hitherto used have been written 
 on an essentially false principle ; for instead of ex- 
 plaining to foreigners clearly and by slight impercepti- 
 ble transitions what, to them, as natives, appeared so 
 easy, the grammarians began by directing the learner's 
 attention to the intricacies of the language, which 
 should be very carefully concealed from the beginner, 
 as they must appear to him very tedious and almost 
 impossible to understand, but which he will easily be 
 able to manage when he comes to know something of 
 the language. 
 
 The present publication is, therefore, chiefly designed 
 for those who study either without the assistance or in 
 the absence of a master, as well as for those who have 
 hitherto pursued a wrong course, and wish to be set 
 right. In my Method, I constantly remind the learners, 
 that in order to become intimately acquainted with the 
 various terminations which constitute the greatest dif- 
 ficulties of the German language, they must decline 
 aloud a great many substantives with adjectives and all 
 sorts of pronouns. But, although the Method is very 
 
comprehensive as to this part of the language, the 
 examples of the various declensions have, therein, for 
 the sake of the systematically arranged questions and 
 answers been so dispersed, and to save room, so often 
 abridged, that the learner will find great assistance in 
 the regular examples which I give here of the different 
 inflections, if not of all, at least of the most important 
 declinable parts of the German language. The verbs, \ 
 the only part left out in this work, have been treated in 
 a most complete manner in the second part of the 
 Method. 
 
 a3 
 
PREFACE 
 
 SECOND EDITION. 
 
 The favourable reception this work has met with at the 
 hands of the public, made it incumbent upon me not to 
 publish this new edition before revising it with the 
 strictest attention. I have therefore spared no pains to 
 render it, in every respect, more useful to the learner, 
 and more worthy of the attention already bestowed by 
 professors upon the former edition. 
 
 67, Rue de Richelieu, Paris. 
 July, 1843. 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 Being convinced that a proper method of pursuing any 
 study often supplies the place of much labour and even 
 of natural talent, I should deem it wrongs if I com- 
 menced this publication without a few preliminary ob- 
 servations on the usefulness of the work and on the 
 study of the pupil; and as these observations are 
 founded on experience, I cannot sufficiently call the 
 attention of the reader to them. 
 
 I shall begin by reminding the pupil of my former 
 advice : he must accustom himself to decline aloud a 
 number of substantives with all sorts of adjectives and 
 pronouns, and that as soon as he has learnt the 
 writing 1 , and commenced the study of the Method, 
 which, as well as the exercises, must not be interrupted 
 on that account. In beginning to decline, however, he 
 must not try to learn the declensions by heart, but must 
 look at each example ; only after having declined a 
 good deal, he must try to say them by heart, without 
 looking either at the examples or his own written de- 
 clensions. Any one who has been in the habit of 
 
 1 The writing must be acquired in the two first lessons. (See those 
 Lessons in Meth. Fart I.) 
 
studying foreign languages will easily conceive the im- 
 portance of this caution. The learner, in trying to say 
 what he does not perfectly know, contracts a habit of 
 hesitating and stammering, which afterwards, when he 
 comes to converse, will form the greatest impediment 
 to fluency of speech. He must, therefore, in the be- 
 ginning, learn more by his eye and ear than otherwise. 
 But it is by the ear that he must learn most ; for when 
 we hear a thing often repeated it strikes our ear in such 
 a manner, that we are, as it were, involuntarily moving 
 our lips to repeat it. It also forms the most essential 
 part in my system, that as every question contains the 
 elements of its answer, the learner, in answering, only 
 repeats what he hears, though he answers in a rational 
 manner and according to his own impulse. It is, how- 
 ever, not by his own answers that he will in the begin- 
 ning acquire fluency of speech, but by listening atten- 
 tively to the questions put to him. He should therefore 
 accustom himself always to give direct, short, and 
 correct answers, and never to hesitate. 
 
 When he has mastered all the different terminations, 
 as if they belonged to his mother tongue, the learner 
 must begin to conjugate the verbs. It will not, on that 
 account, be necessary to reach the end of the first 
 volume; an assiduous scholar, who is anxious to ad- 
 vance, will begin to conjugate at the six and thirtieth 
 lesson, and as soon as he is master of the mechanism of 
 conjugation, he may commence to read some of the 
 German authors, still, however, without interrupting 
 the study of the Method. I strongly advise the pupil 
 
to begin by the selection of pieces placed at the end 
 of the second part of the Method, and which are ar- 
 ranged according to their respective difficulties. 
 
 It is essential to remind the learner, that the addition 
 or omission of the smallest particle entirely alters the 
 signification of the verb 2 . He will therefore in readings 
 have to look for each word in the dictionary, and adapt 
 its sense to the other words of the sentence. If the 
 word is not found in the dictionary, it must be sought 
 for in the alphabetical table of the irregular verbs 
 (Meth. Part II.), and if it be a compound verb, as 
 befcfyluge, for example, the particle be must be taken off 
 and the verb looked for in the letters fcfy of the irregu- 
 lar verbs. There it will be found that fd)luge is the 
 imperfect of the subjunctive of the verb fd}lagett, to 
 beat; to this infinitive the particle be must again be 
 added, which will give befcfytagen, the signification of 
 which will be found in the dictionary. The meaning 
 of words such as : jlanb au$ f banb loS, f)idi inne, the par- 
 
 2 The evidence of this truth will be easily recognized by comparing 
 the verb gehert/ to go, with some of its compounds, as, abgetjeri/ to depart, 
 to retire ; angebert/ to concern, to be bearable ; aufgeben/ to rise, to open ; 
 auggehert/ to go out, to die away; begeftett/ to commit; burcfygehen, to 
 pass through, to examine; eingebetl/ to waste away; entgebetl/ to escape ; 
 ergeben/ to happen ; fortgeben and weggeben, to go away ; fyergefien, to 
 approach ; bmgefyen, to go there, to pass ; bintergefyen/ to deceive ; 
 mttgeben, to accompany; nacfygeben/ to follow; ubergeben/ to desert; 
 Itmgefyert/ to associate, to revolve ; untergeberi/ to set, to sink, to perish ; 
 Dergefyen/ to pass away, to elapse, to perish ; gergefyeri/ to melt, to dis- 
 solve ; jugefyerv to go fast, to shut ; &c. 
 
tides of which are often placed at the end of the sen- 
 tence^ must not be sought for either in the letters, a, l, t, 
 but amongst the letters jf, b, f), of the table of irregular 
 verbs. It will be found there, that (krtb, banb, fyiett, are 
 the imperfects of the verbs jftfyen, binben, fyalten ; to these 
 infinitives the separable particles, au3, fo§, inne, must be 
 added, which will give auSjIefyen, loSbinben, innefyalten, 
 the signification of which will be found in the dic- 
 tionary. 
 
 The greatest difficulty in acquiring a foreign lan- 
 guage, and particularly the German, is undoubtedly 
 that of knowing how to speak and to answer with 
 facility the questions put to us. When once this diffi- 
 culty is conquered, a result that may be attained at 
 the end of the first thirty-six lessons, the pupil will have 
 nothing to do but to perfect himself in declining and 
 conjugating. He may then be said to have acquired 
 the language ; for he then will only have to remember 
 the nomenclature of the words, and to account for the 
 rules. 
 
 I have thought it advisable in the second part of the 
 Method to give a recapitulation of all the parts of 
 speech, especially for those persons who, not having 
 sufficiently studied the grammar of their native tongue, 
 will not be sorry, to find there a few simple explana- 
 tions on general grammar. 
 
 Besides the lessons and exercises, the pupil must pre- 
 scribe to himself for each lesson a certain number of 
 adverbs, prepositions, or conjunctions to study (Method, 
 Part II.); and as the newly acquired words are re- 
 
peated, he must always repeat a part of what he has 
 learnt in the preceding lessons. 
 
 I am not afraid to assert, and the success which I 
 have so frequently obtained warrants my assertion, 
 that the pupil who has regularly followed my advice, 
 and attentively studied my two volumes (I do not even 
 except those who have but little natural talent for 
 languages,) will have as perfect a knowledge of German, 
 will read, write, and speak it, as if he had been educated 
 in Germany. 
 
 I advise those persons who are on the point of travel- 
 ling in Germany, or of passing an examination, and 
 who are anxious to obtain a general knowledge of the 
 language, to begin by mastering the declension of nouns, 
 of the adjectives, and of the adjective pronouns con- 
 tained in this work, as well as the mechanism of con- 
 jugation (Meth. Part II.). This will only take about a 
 fortnight at most. With the assistance of a dictionary 
 they will then be able to read the German authors, at 
 the cost of a little more trouble, it is true, than those 
 who regularly study the Method will experience. I 
 advise them also to read the lessons of the first volume, 
 without writing the exercises. This study, if it may be 
 termed such, will stand them instead of the analyzed 
 dialogues, and will give them the faculty of expressing 
 themselves in German. They will be thereby enabled, 
 without loss of time, to obtain a certain acquaintance 
 with the language in less than a month ; they can after- 
 wards improve upon it as time or inclination prompts 
 them. 
 
EXTRACT FROM CAPTAIN BASIL HALL'S " SCHLOSS HAINFELD; OR, 
 A WINTER IN LOWER STYRIA." 
 
 " It was not till I had spent nearly a 
 year in Germany, and after I had read, 
 written, and spoken German with much 
 diligence and the most constant oppor- 
 tunities of hearing it in the country 
 itself, that I learned, with no small mor- 
 tification, that I had all along been pro- 
 ceeding on a wrong system, and that the 
 methods which I had found sufficient to 
 give me a certain sort of knowledge of 
 French and Spanish in Europe, and of 
 Hindostanee and Malays in the East, 
 were totally inoperative when applied to 
 the formidable German. 
 
 " By good fortune, however, I fell in 
 with a truly philosophical professor of 
 German at Paris, M. Ollendorff, author 
 of a new and most luminous method 
 of teaching that language. He soon 
 satisfied me of what I had indeed myself 
 begun to suspect, that German, to be 
 understood properly, must be attacked | 
 exactly like Mathematics — and that as 
 there is no 'royal road' to knowledge 
 in the one case, so is there none in the I 
 other. I gave a sigh or two over the 
 ten months' labour I had almost entirely 
 thrown away, and commenced the study 
 anew through the medium of M. Ollen- 
 dorff's method, which well deserves the 
 title of the Euclid of German. After six 
 months' close application, I can venture 
 to pronounce that by his Method alone, so 
 far as I have been able to understand the j 
 subject, can this very difficult, but very I 
 charming language, be taught without i 
 confusion. To those, who like me, have 
 none of that readiness by which, instinc- 
 tively as it were, foreign tongues are 
 breathed in by some people, and are 
 made use of seemingly without effort, | 
 such a method is quite invaluable. By 
 it the scholar advances step by step, 
 understands clearly and thoroughly 
 every thing he reads, and as he goes 
 on, he becomes sensible that all he 
 learns he retains, and all that he retains 
 
 is useful and practically applicable. At 
 the same time, he scarcely knows how 
 he has got hold of it, so slightly marked 
 are the shades of daily progression ; and 
 so gentle is the rise, that he feels no un- 
 pleasant fatigue on the journey. Of 
 course, the student is called upon to 
 exert no small degree of patient applica- 
 tion, and he must consent to devote a 
 considerable portion of his time to this 
 pursuit; but he will have the encou- 
 raging conviction that every particle of 
 effort is well bestowed. 
 
 " I wish I could persuade this admira- 
 ble teacher to publish his work in En- 
 glish and in England, and to fix himself 
 in London, where his abilities, his 
 knowledge, and his skill in teaching so 
 difficult a language in the most agree- 
 able and patient manner I ever wit- 
 nessed, would soon earn for him the 
 distinction he deserves. I write in these 
 strong terms of M. Ollendorff's method, 
 because I feel convinced that a familiar- 
 ity with it would go far to spi ad the 
 knowledge of this delightful language in 
 England, where, of all the countries in 
 the world, it is most likely to be duly 
 appreciated. The almost matchless beau- 
 ties of German, not only frr their own 
 excellence, but from their analogy to 
 those of our own Literature, and the 
 great similarity of character between the 
 two people, are calculated produce a 
 much greater effect with than else- 
 where. Independently, ai>. ; , of the 
 wholesome pleasure whicl I uongs to 
 an elegant pursuit, the stu of the 
 German may do much good, - only by 
 the generous cultivation of ih. national 
 taste, and the vigorous exercise of in- 
 dividual thought which it requires, but 
 by its placing within our reach an im- 
 mense store of mental merchandize, in 
 exchange for which the labor 1- of six 
 months is the cheapest poss.ole pay- 
 ment." 
 
GERMAN GRAMMAR. 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 Declension of Substantives. 
 
 Preliminary Observations. 
 
 A. All substantives, without exception, take tt in the 
 dative 'case of the plural, if they have not one in the 
 nominative. 
 
 B. yfl masculine and neuter substantives ending in el, 
 en, er w as also diminutives in cfyett and letn, have the 
 same ^rmination in the plural as in the singular. 
 
 C. All feminine substantives, without exception, re- 
 main invariable in the singular. 
 
 1 These three terminations exactly correspond in pronunciation to the 
 F- 6 Iish word Eleanor. 
 
 B 
 
A TABLE 
 
 Of the Declension of Substantives. 
 
 Subst. Masculine. 
 
 RULE I. 
 
 3 or e§. 
 or e* 
 
 e, 
 e, 
 
 en or n, 
 
 e, 
 
 
 f N< 
 
 >H 
 
 
 S3 
 
 (i. 
 
 p 
 
 D. 
 
 & 
 
 i A. 
 
 
 r N. 
 
 13 
 
 G. 
 
 s 
 
 D. 
 
 
 La. 
 
 Subst. Feminine. 
 
 RULE II. 
 
 N/ 
 
 
 G. 
 D 
 
 > invariable 
 
 A. 
 
 
 N 'l 
 
 
 G. 
 D. 
 
 • en or n* 
 
 A J 
 
 
 Subst. Neuter. 
 
 RULE III. 
 
 N. 
 
 
 G. 
 
 6 or e£ 
 
 D. 
 
 or e* 
 
 A. 
 
 
 N. 
 
 er. 
 
 G. 
 
 er. 
 
 D. 
 
 em. 
 
 A. 
 
 er. 
 
 DIVISION I. 
 
 Declension of Masculine Substantives. 
 
 Rule I. — Masculine substantives take e3 or 3 in the 
 genitive case singular : those ending in el, en, er, take §, 
 and nothing in the dative ; most others, particularly 
 those ending in 3, ft, j, ^, take e$, and e in the dative. 
 They take e in all cases of the plural 2 , and soften the 
 radical vowels a, 0, It, into d, 6, u. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 1. Of a masculine noun which changes the radical 
 vowel a into d in the plural. 
 
 2 Independently of the n in the dative : if therefore we shall speak here- . 
 after of the four cases of the plural, the n of the dative must always be 
 supposed. (See Preliminary Observation^.) 
 
Singular. 
 
 N. ber SBall/ the rampart. 
 G. beg SBaUeg/ of the rampart 
 D. bzxn SBdtfe/ to the rampart. 
 
 A. ben SBatt/ the rampart. 
 
 Plural. 
 bte SBdlte/ the ramparts, 
 
 ber SSSdttC/ of the ramparts, 
 ben SSdtlen/ to the ramparts, 
 bie SBdlte/ the ramparts. 
 
 2. Of a masculine noun which changes the radical 
 vowel o into 6 in the plural. 
 
 N. ber (Sobn/ the son. 
 G. beg ©Ohneg, of the son. 
 D. bim (Sohne, to the son. 
 A. ben (Sofyn/ the son. 
 
 bte (Sohne/ the sons, 
 
 ber ©ofyne/ of the sons, 
 
 ben ©6bnen/ to the sons, 
 
 bte <S6bne/ the sons. 
 
 3. Of a masculine noun in fj, adding in the genitive 
 singular e$, in the dative e, and changing $ into ff in the 
 genitive and dative singular and in all the cases of the 
 plural. It also changes in the plural the radical vowel 
 U into tt. 
 
 ■ N. ber $luf/ the river. 
 
 G. beg glltjfeg, of the river. 
 D. bem $luffe/ to the river. 
 A. bin §luj?/ the river. 
 
 bte glfiffe, the rivers, 
 ber ^luffe/ of the rivers, 
 ben glufieit/ to the rivers, 
 bte $iufje/ the rivers. 
 
 4. Of a masculine noun ending in el (see Preliminary 
 Observation B.) which takes only 3 in the genitive 
 singular, nothing in the dative, and has in the plural 
 the same termination as in the singular. 
 
 N. ber (Spiegel/ the looking- 
 glass. 
 
 G. beg (Sptegelg/ of the looking- 
 glass. 
 
 the looking- 
 glasses. 
 of the looking- 
 glasses. 
 to the looking- 
 glasses, 
 the looking- 
 glasses. 
 
 5. Of a masculine noun ending in en (see Preliminary 
 Observation B.) which takes only 6 in the genitive sin- 
 b2 
 
 D. bem (Spiegel, to the looking- 
 glass. 
 A. bin (Spiegel/ the looking- 
 
 bie (Spiegel/ 
 
 ber (Spiegel/ 
 
 ben (Sptegeln/ 
 
 bte (Spiegel/ 
 
gular, nothing in the dative, and has in the plural the 
 same termination as in the singular. 
 
 N. ber ©arten, the £ 
 
 G. beg ©artcnS, of the garden. 
 
 D. bem ©actctl/ to the garden. 
 
 A. ben ©arten, the garden. 
 
 bte ©drtcti/ 
 bee @firten, 
 ben ©arten, 
 bte ©drten 
 
 the gardens, 
 the gardens, 
 the gardens, 
 the gardens. 
 
 6. Of a masculine noun ending in er (see Preliminary 
 Observation B.) which takes only 6 in the genitive sin- 
 gular, nothing in the dative, and has in the plural the 
 same termination as in the singular. 
 
 N. ber SSruber/ the brother. bte SSrubetV the brothers. 
 
 G. beg £3ruberS/ of the brother. ber S3rfiber, of the brothers. 
 
 D. bem S3ruber/ to the brother. ben SSrfibeW/ to the brothers. 
 
 A. ben 33ruber, the brother. bte SBrfiber, the brothers. 
 
 Observations. 
 
 A. The genitive singular of masculine and neuter nouns 
 sometimes terminates in 6, and sometimes in e3, except 
 those in et, en, er, cfyert and letn, which always take §♦ 
 These forms are equally good ; but the former is more 
 frequently used in conversation, and the latter in com- 
 position. The same distinction ought to be observed 
 with regard to the dative singular of masculine and 
 neuter nouns which takes e when the genitive takes c§. 
 (See the three first examples above.) 
 
 B. Nouns ending in $ change jj into ff whenever the 
 word receives any addition by the declension. (See the 
 third example above.) When $ is preceded by a long 
 vowel, however, it is not changed. The substantives in 
 which jjj is preceded by a long vowel have in this book 
 been marked thus : ~~ Ex. ber giTj3, the foot. 
 
nSS \%vf! 
 
 - : X ' ^ 
 
 ^ ^ ^ ^ 
 
 V^ ' 
 
 1 
 
 M M M M 
 
 > v S? \? «K 
 
 ■ J I I i 
 
 i *$ ^| ^$ 
 
 \x 
 
 N 
 
C. In compound words the last of the component 
 words only is softened. Ex. ber $au§$ater, the father of 
 the family; Plur. bie £>au3ttdfer* £)er £3orfyang, the cur- 
 tain ; Plur. fc>ie SSor^driQC* In the diphthong an, a is 
 softened. Ex. ber 33attm, the tree; Plur. bie SSdume* 
 In the diphthong eit, the letter u is not softened. Ex. 
 ber gteimb, the friend; Plur. bie greunbe. In double 
 vowels one is softened in the plural, and the other is 
 suppressed. Ex. ber 'Baal, the saloon ; Plur. bie ©die* 
 
 D. Do not soften the radical vowels in the plural : 
 
 a.) Masculine substantives derived from feminine 
 substantives. Ex. ber itutfcfyer, the coachman, derived 
 from biz jfcutfcfye, the coach ; Plur. bie j^utfcfyer. 
 
 b.) From a regular verb. Ex. ber SSefud), the visit, 
 derived from fucfyen, to seek ; Plur. bie 33efud)e. 
 
 c.) From a name of a town. Ex. ber ^artfer, the 
 Parisian ; Plur. bte $arifer* 
 
 On the opposite plate the learner will see how he is 
 to write his declensions and his exercises. 
 
 MASCULINE SUBSTANTIVES, 
 
 To serve as Examples to the preceding Rules. 
 
 £>er 2Cbgrunb, the abyss. | £)er 2Cbj!anb, the distance. 
 — llbfyariQ, the slope. — Zbt, the abbot. 
 
 b3 
 
£)cr tfcfer, the field. 
 
 — 2tyfel, the apple. 
 
 — 2(|T, the branch. 
 
 — &3acb, the brook. 
 
 — S3att, the beard. 
 
 — &3aum, the tree. 
 
 — SSltcf, the look. 
 
 — Robert, the ground, 
 
 the bottom. 
 
 — 33ogen, the arch. 
 
 £>er SSricf, the letter. 
 
 — £>amm, the dyke. 
 
 — £>egen, the sword. 
 
 — £)teb, the thief. 
 
 — &unjt, the vapour. 
 
 — (Sngcl, the angel. 
 
 — gaben, the thread. 
 
 — gall, the case. 
 
 — geberfrct, the quill. 
 
 Obs. — Words terminated in id or ter, in which e only 
 serves to lengthen the syllable, must not be considered 
 as words ending in el, cr. They take, like the other 
 masculine nouns, c in the plural. 
 
 £)er gefylet, the fault. 
 
 — gdnb, the enemy. 
 
 — gifd), the fish. 
 
 — greimb, the friend. 
 
 — gud)§, the fox. 
 
 — gug, the foot. 
 
 — ®ang, the walk. 
 
 — ©ebraucb, the custom. 
 
 — ©etutjj, the enjoyment. 
 
 — ©efang, the singing. 
 
 — ©raben, the ditch. 
 
 — ©ru(3, the salute. 
 
 — 4pabrt, the cock. 
 
 — Jpit(3, the neck. 
 
 — J^ieb, the blow. 
 
 £)er ^tmmel, the heaven. 
 
 — i£>of, the court. 
 
 — £ut, the hat. 
 
 — Jtamm, the comb. 
 
 — ^ncd)t, the valet. 
 
 — Jtnopf, the button. 
 
 — Mo&), the cook. 
 
 — Jlontg, the king. 
 
 — itopf, the head. 
 
 — Sioxb, the basket. 
 
 — jtrug, the pitcher. 
 
 — Slu$, the kiss. 
 
 — feaben, the shop. 
 
 — Mangel, the want. 
 
 — Mantel, the cloak. 
 
£)er fBtarf t, the market. 
 
 — 9tagel, the nail. 
 
 — £)fen, the oven. 
 
 — SPapft, the pape. 
 
 — SPaUajl, the palace. 
 
 — $pia&, the place. 
 
 — Siegenfcfyirm, the um- 
 
 brella. 
 
 — Sfting, the ring. 
 
 — Sftocf, the coat. 
 
 — (Bad, the bag. 
 
 — @a£, the sentence. 
 
 — ©cfyatJ, the treasure. 
 
 — ©d)lag, the blow. 
 
 — ©cfylttten, the sledge. 
 
 — ©cfylunt), the gulf. 
 
 — ©cfynabel, the bill, the 
 
 beak. 
 
 — ©cfyttj*, the shot. 
 
 — <Sci)roager,thebrother- 
 
 in-law. 
 
 — (Sd)tt)an, the swan. 
 
 — <Sieg, the victory. 
 
 — @pumg, the jump. 
 
 — ©tall, the stable. 
 
 — ©tarnm, the trunk. 
 
 — @tanb, the condition. 
 
 £)er (Stein, the stone. 
 
 — ©tern, the star. 
 
 — <Stiet 3 , the handle. 
 
 — <5tocf, the stick. 
 
 — (Stored, the stork. 
 
 — (Strand), the shrub. 
 
 — @trumpf, the stock- 
 
 ing. 
 
 — ©tufyl, the chair. 
 
 — Sfyurm, the tower. 
 
 — %i\&), the table. 
 
 — £cm, the sound. 
 
 — Sopf, the pot. 
 
 — Sraum, the dream. 
 
 — SSatcr, the father. 
 
 — SSogel, the bird. 
 
 — SSagen, the carriage. 
 
 — SBein, the wine. 
 
 — SBmfc, the wind. 
 
 — SBolf, the wolf. 
 
 — SBurm, the worm. 
 ■ — Rafyri, the tooth. 
 
 — j$aum, the bridle. 
 
 — 3aun, the hedge. 
 
 — 3eug, the stuff. 
 
 — 3ug, the feature. 
 
 See the preceding Observation. 
 
EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 I. The following masculine substantives do not soften 
 in the plural the radical vowels. 
 
 £)et %al, the eel. 
 
 — 2Cbenb r the evening. 
 
 — 2Ct>let, the eagle. 
 
 — 2(bmttal, the admiral, 
 
 — 2Crm, the arm. 
 
 — 33rumien, the fountain. 
 
 — £)old), the dagger. 
 
 — £)ral)t, the wire. 
 
 — ©emafyt, the husband. 
 
 — (general, the general. 
 
 — ©rab, the degree. 
 
 — ©rofcfyen, the grosh. 
 
 — ©ulben, the florin. 
 
 — $abtcfyt, the hawk. 
 
 — £alm, the straw, the 
 
 halm. 
 
 — pamper, the German 
 
 marmot. 
 
 — 4)arrt, the urine. 
 
 — ixtJOQ, the duke. 
 
 — vgmnb, the dog. 
 
 — jtapatm, the capon. 
 
 — Coffer, the trunk. 
 
 — itrantd), the crane. 
 
 £)er Jtucfyert, the cake. 
 
 — %ati)$, the salmon. 
 
 — Sttatber, the martin. 
 
 — SSlomt, the month. 
 
 — £)()etm, the uncle. 
 
 — $fab, the path. 
 
 — $fto:pfor$Pfro:pfen,the 
 
 cork. 
 
 — $)lan, the scheme, the 
 
 design. 
 
 — $ubel, the spaniel. 
 
 — $)ul3, the pulse. 
 
 — ^)unft, the point. 
 
 — ©alat, the salad. 
 
 — ©cfyatten, the shadow. 
 
 — ©d)uf), the shoe. 
 
 — <&taax, the starling. 
 
 — ©toff, the stuff. 
 
 — (&txau$, the ostrich. 
 
 — Sag, the day. 
 
 — Scaler, the crown 
 
 (money). 
 
 — 3obel, the sable. 
 
Exception II. 
 
 This exception contains nouns which take ett or n* in 
 the genitive singular, and retain this termination in all 
 the cases of the plural in which they do not soften the 
 radical vowels. They are divided into three classes, viz. 
 
 First. All masculine nouns ending in e 5 , to which we 
 must reckon the names of nations having this termina- 
 tion, and all adjectives taken substantively, when pre- 
 ceded by the definite article. 
 
 Singular. 
 N. ber Hm, the lion. 
 
 G. be§ £6roen/ of the lion. 
 D. bem Soweii/ to the lion. 
 A. ben Vomilf the lion. 
 
 Example, 
 
 Plural. 
 
 bte S6tt?eH/ the lions. 
 
 ber £6it>eri/ of the lions. 
 
 ben Somen/ to the lions. 
 
 bie Htvzn, the lions. 
 
 In the same manner are declined the following : 
 
 £)er 2Cffe, the ape. 
 
 — SSarbe, the bard. 
 
 — S5otc, the messenger. 
 
 — £3ube, the knave. 
 
 — 33 ucfyjf abe, the letter. 
 
 — SSufyle, the paramour. 
 
 — S3 urge, the bail. 
 
 £)er £)rad)e, the dragon. 
 
 — drbe, the heir. 
 
 — galfe, the falcon. 
 
 — gtnfe, the finch. 
 
 — (Qattt, the consort. 
 
 — ©efdfyrte, the com- 
 
 panion. 
 
 4 Those ending in e take n only, the others of this exception take en, 
 except the following four which also take n : ber 33crier/ ber 23auer, fcer 
 ©coatter/ ber Sftacbbar. 
 
 5 Except ber ^dfe/ the cheese; gen. sing. beg $&fe§/ plur. tie Mfe. 
 
10 
 
 £>er ©cfyitlfe, the assistant. 
 
 — ©enoffe, the partner. 
 
 — ©cfptele, the play-fel- 
 
 low. 
 
 — ©o^e, the idol. 
 
 — $afe, the hare. 
 
 — «£)etbe, the pagan. 
 
 — £trte, the swain. 
 
 — Sunge, the lad. 
 
 — Mnabt, the boy. 
 
 — ^nappe, the lad, the 
 
 page. 
 
 — Sate, the layman. 
 
 — ^adjfomme, the de- 
 
 scendant. 
 
 — Sftejfe, the nephew. 
 
 — £)cfyfe, the ox. 
 
 — tyatljt, the godfather. 
 
 — ^)faffe, the priest. 
 
 — SRabz, the raven. 
 
 — Sftiefe, the giant. 
 
 — ©cfyitlje, the village- 
 
 justice. 
 
 £)er ©cfyurfe, the rascal. 
 
 — ©djufce, the shooter. 
 
 — ©toe, the slave. 
 
 — 3^ge, the witness. 
 
 — 33ol)me, the Bohe- 
 
 mian. 
 
 — SSrttte, the Briton. 
 
 — £)ane, the Dane. 
 
 — £)eutfd)e, the German. 
 
 — grcmjofe, the French- 
 
 man. 
 
 — ©etmane,the German 
 
 (of old). 
 
 — ©rtecfye, the Greek. 
 
 — <£>effe, the Hessian. 
 
 — 3ube, the Jew. 
 
 — Spole, the Pole. 
 
 — 93rett£ e, the Prussian. 
 
 — 9£uj|e, the Russian. 
 
 — @acfyfe, the Saxon. 
 
 — ©cfywabe, the Suabian. 
 
 — <2cfytt)ebe, the Swede. 
 
 — Surf e, the Turk, &c. 
 
 Second. Nouns taken from foreign languages and 
 ending in : ant, ard), at, it, ent, ijl, it, 09, as : — 
 
 £)er 2£bjutant, the adjutant. 
 
 — (ionfonant, the conso- 
 
 nant. 
 
 — jtomobtattt, the come- 
 
 dian. 
 
 £)er ^onard), the monarch, 
 
 — 2(btiof at, the lawyer. 
 
 — ^anbtbat, the candi- 
 
 date. 
 
 — ©olbat, the soldier. 
 
11 
 
 £)et hornet, the comet. 
 
 — planet, the planet. 
 
 — 5)oet, the poet, 
 
 — 5)ropfyet, the prophet. 
 
 — SPrdftbetlt, the presi- 
 
 dent. 
 
 £)er (Stubertr, the student. 
 
 — CEfyrtjr, the Christian. 
 
 — 5)iettjl, the pietist. 
 
 — ©remit, the hermit. 
 
 — Sfyeolog, the theolo- 
 
 gian, &c. 
 
 Obs. £)er $Ra$iftxat, the magistrate, has in the genitive 
 §, and in the plur. e. Ex. £)e£ 9fta<JtjIrat§, plur. £)ie 
 Sftagtftrate. 
 
 Third. The following words : — 
 
 £)et 33 at, the bear. 
 ■ — SBater 6 , the Bavarian. 
 
 — SSarbar, the barbarian. 
 
 — 33auer, the peasant. 
 
 — Safari, the pheasant. 
 
 — §et£, the rock. 
 
 — glecf, the spot. 
 
 — gurjt, the prince, the 
 
 sovereign. 
 
 — ©ecf, the fool. 
 
 — ©efell, the companion. 
 
 — ©ettatter 7 , the god- 
 
 father, the gossip. 
 
 £>er ©raf, the count. 
 
 — ^etb, the hero. 
 
 — v£>err 8 , the master, the 
 
 lord. 
 
 — «£>ttfar, the hussar. 
 
 — Stafyoli?, the Catholic. 
 
 — itofaf, the Cossack. 
 
 — £eoparb, the leopard. 
 
 — Sittenfci), man [homo). 
 
 — 9M)r, the Moor. 
 
 — 9lad)bar 9 , the neigh- 
 
 bour. 
 
 — %laxx, the fool. 
 
 6 See Note 4. Page 9. 
 
 7 £)er ©eoattet/ may also be declined according to the substantives end- 
 ing in ZX-i but then it does not soften the radical vowel in the plural. 
 
 8 It is better to say ^errn in the genitive and the other cases of the 
 singular ; but the plural is always ^erren. 
 
 9 It is better to say in the genitive singular beg 9 f lad)bat'§/ and conse- 
 quently the dative and accusative singular add nothing; but in the plural 
 an n must be added to all the cases. (See Note 4. Page 9.) 
 
12 
 
 £)cr patriot, the patriot. 
 
 — SPfatt; the peacock. 
 
 — $))()ilofopf), the philo- 
 
 sopher. 
 
 — 3)rdfect, the prefect. 
 
 — ^ttrig, the prince. 
 
 £)er Tartar, the Tartar. 
 
 — jtfyox, the fool. 
 
 — Sprann, the tyrant. 
 
 — Ungar,theHungarian. 
 
 — ttntertl)an,the subject. 
 
 — SBorfafyr, the ancestor. 
 
 Obs. About a good many words the German declen- 
 sion has hitherto not been settled ; for they are found 
 declined sometimes in one way and sometimes in ano- 
 ther. Such are the following : — 
 
 £)er f&alt en, the beam. 
 
 — grteben, peace. 
 
 — gunfen, the spark. 
 
 — ©ebanfen, the thought. 
 
 — ©efallen, the favour. 
 
 — ©lauben, faith. 
 
 — $aufen, the heap. 
 
 £)er Seamen, the name. 
 
 — ©amen, the seed. 
 
 — ©d)aben, the damage. 
 ■ — ©fatten, the shadow. 
 
 — ©cfylttten, the sledge. 
 
 — mikn, the will. 
 
 These words were formerly : ber SSalfe, ber griebe, ber 
 gunfe, &c, so that many Germans do not know whether 
 they must say in the genitive singular be£ 33 alien, be3 
 grieben, be» gunfen, or be3 $3alfen3, be3 grieben§, be£ gun- 
 fen§. According to the rules which I gave on the de- 
 clension of masculine substantives, this difficulty van- 
 ishes at once ; for if we say, according to the present 
 orthography, in the nominative singular ber SSalfcn, ber 
 grieben, &c, we must, after my rules on masculine sub- 
 stantives, add in the genitive singular an 3 and leave the 
 plural unaltered (Genitive be§ S5alfeng, plur. bte SSalfem). 
 If, on the contrary, we wish to say in the nominative 
 sing. : ber SSalf c, ber griebe, ber gun! e, then these substan- 
 
13 
 
 tives belong to the nouns ending in e, given in Excep- 
 tion II., Class First, and which take n in all the cases 
 singular and plural (Genitive be6 SSalfen, plur. t>ie 
 fallen 10 ). 
 
 The same observation applies to the substantive ©cfyrcf* 
 fen, and similar ones, which some spell ©cfyrecf ; for if 
 it is in the nominative ©cfytecfen, it has in the genitive 
 3, and remains uninflected in all the cases of the plural, 
 agreeably to my preliminary Observation B., on mas- 
 culine and neuter substantives ending in el, en, er ; but 
 if on the contrary it is ©d)recf, it has in the genitive 
 singular 6, and e in all the cases of the plural. 
 
 Exception III. 
 
 This consists of masculine substantives which take en 
 in all the cases of the plural, without softening the 
 radical vowels, though in the singular they follow the 
 general rule on the declension of masculine substantives. 
 They are, 
 
 First. All words derived from Latin and terminating 
 in or, such as: — 
 
 £)er itantor, the chanter. 
 
 — doctor, the doctor. 
 
 — Snfpcctor, the inspec- 
 
 tor. 
 
 £)er 93ajfor, the pastor. 
 
 — SProfefTor, the pro- 
 
 fessor. 
 
 — Sector, the rector, &c. 
 
 10 In reading the German classics, the learner will find many in- 
 stances of the truth of this assertion — in Sutber'g SStbel, in .KlopjlocB'g/ 
 in SSielant'g/ in ^perber'S/ and even in ©chiller's and ©otbe'S works. But 
 to be convinced at once, the reader has only to consult ^ZX)\Zi considered 
 all over Germany the best Grammarian of the day. 
 
 C 
 
14 
 
 Obs. From this rule must be excepted those nouns 
 which have the tonic accent on the syllable or, such as, 
 ber Jlajior, the castor; ber junior, the humour; ber 
 Sftatabor, the matadore, &c. They take, like other mas- 
 culine substantives, § in the genitive singular, and e in 
 all the cases of the plural, but do not soften the vowels. 
 
 Second. The ten following substantives. The first 
 five take en, the other four rt only. 
 
 £)cr fDtojt, the mast. 
 
 — ©cfymerj, the pain. 
 
 — (Sporrt \ the spur. 
 
 — ©raat, the state. 
 
 — ©trafyl/ the beam. 
 
 £)er (Sec 2 , the lake. 
 
 — ^Pantoffel, the slipper. 
 
 — ©tacfyel, the sting. 
 
 — ©tiefel, the boot. 
 
 — ^Setter 3 , the cousin. 
 
 Exception IV. 
 
 There are a few masculine substantives which take er 
 in all the cases of the plural and soften the radical 
 vowels. They are, 
 
 First. The following nine substantives : — 
 
 ©ott, God. 
 
 £)er 33ofett>td)r, the profli- 
 gate man. 
 
 £)er ©eift, the ghost. 
 
 — Seib, the body. 
 
 — SSttarm, the man (vir). 
 
 1 The plural of ber ©porn is (Sporen. 
 
 2 This word is in the plural pronounced as if it were @ee=en. 
 
 3 It would be desirable that these last four substantives were classed 
 under the general rule of masculine and neuter substantives ending in el/ 
 e ri/ er. Besides, there is nothing more contrary to the harmony of a 
 good German pronunciation than an n added to the nominative plural of 
 the word SSetter. I must however here mention, that many good authors 
 have already in their compositions omitted the letter n in the plural of 
 these words. 
 
15 
 
 £>tt !Dxt, the place. 
 — !Ranb, the edge. 
 
 £)et SSormunb, the guardian. 
 — SBalb, the forest. 
 
 Second. Masculine substantives ending in tfyum; 
 Ex.:— 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 Der Swtfyum, tne error. 
 — fftlifytyum, the riches. 
 
 £>te Stttfyumer, 
 — Stiifyfyumtx, 
 
 Obs. — Compound words in mann, as, bet £auptmann, 
 the captain, change, in the plural, this termination into 
 Jeute, Ex. : — 
 
 Singular. 
 
 £)et ^auptmann, the cap- 
 tain. 
 
 — Qftelmatm, the noble- 
 
 man. 
 
 — gufyrmann, the carter. 
 
 — 3immermann, the car- 
 
 penter. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 ©ie Soauptkutt, the cap- 
 tains. 
 
 — (Sftelleute, the noble- 
 
 men. 
 
 — gufyrleute, the carters. 
 
 — Simmerleute, the car- 
 
 penters. 
 
 DIVISION II. 
 
 Declension of Feminine Substantives. 
 
 Rule II. — All feminine substantives, without excep- 
 tion, together with all foreign feminine words adopted 
 into German, as bie gorm, the form ; bte Stnie, the line, 
 remain invariable in all the cases singular. (See pre- 
 liminary Obs. C.) Feminine substantives ending in e, 
 el, er, add n, and all others en, in all the cases of the 
 plural; and do not soften the radical vowels. (See 
 Table of the Declension of Substantives, page 2.) 
 c2 
 
16 
 
 Examples. 
 1. Of a feminine noun ending in e. 
 
 N. bte 33Utme, the flower. 
 
 G. ber SSlume, of the flower. 
 
 D. ber SSllime, to the flower. 
 
 A. bte 33lume, the flower. 
 
 tie SBlumen, the flowers, 
 
 ber 25lumen, of the flowers, 
 
 ben SStumen/ to the flowers, 
 
 bte 2S(umetl/ the flowers. 
 
 2. Of a feminine noun ending, in el. 
 
 N. bte ®aUl, the fork. 
 
 G. ber ®abel, of the fork. 
 
 D. ber ©abel, to the fork. 
 A. bte ©abel, 
 
 3 
 
 bte ©abeltl/ the forks. 
 
 ber @abe (rt/ of the forks. 
 
 ben ©abeln/ to the forks. 
 
 the fork. bte ©abetn/ the forks. 
 
 Of a feminine noun ending in er. 
 
 N. bte' $eber/ 
 
 G. ber geber/ 
 
 D. ber geber/ 
 
 A. bte geber/ 
 
 ^the pen. 
 
 of the pen. 
 
 to the pen. 
 
 the pen. 
 
 bte $ebern/ the pens, 
 
 ber $ebern/ of the pens. 
 
 ben gebern/ to the pens. 
 
 bte $ebern> the pens. 
 
 4. Of a feminine noun not having either of the endings 
 
 e, el, et. 
 
 N. bte 2Cnttt)0rt, the answer. 
 
 G. ber 2tntwort/ of the answer. 
 
 D. ber 2Cnttt>ort/ to the answer. 
 
 A. bte 2CntW0rt, the answer. 
 
 bte 2fntrt>orten, the answers, 
 
 ber lintrvovtttt, of the answers, 
 
 ben 2Cntir-orten/ to the answers, 
 
 bte 2Cntr»orten/ the answers. 
 
 5. Of a feminine noun derived from a foreign 
 language. 
 
 bte ^erfonen/ the persons, 
 
 ber ^perfonen/ of the persons, 
 
 ben ^erfoneil/ to the persons, 
 
 bte ^perfonenf the persons. 
 
 N. bte $)erfon/ the person. 
 
 G. ber ^Perfon/ of the person. 
 
 D. ber $Perfon> to the person. 
 
 A. bte ^Perfon, the person. 
 
 On the opposite plate the learner will see how he is 
 to decline in writing. 
 
17 
 
 FEMININE SUBSTANTIVES, 
 
 To serve as examples to the preceding rules. 
 
 £te 2£bgabe, the tax. 
 
 — 2£bftd)t, the intention. 
 
 — 2£ber, the vein. 
 
 — 2£r;nbtmg, the fore- 
 
 boding. 
 
 — 2Cnjklt, the prepara- 
 
 tive. 
 
 — Arbeit, the work. 
 
 — %xiz, the air, the tune. 
 
 — 2Crgnct, the medicine. 
 
 — SBetetbtgung, the of- 
 
 fence. 
 
 — S5tbliotl)ef, the library. 
 
 — @nte, the duck. 
 
 • — (grbfcfyaft, the inherit- 
 ance. 
 
 — ©JTettj, the essence. 
 
 — gabrtf, the fabric. 
 
 — gdfyigfeit, the capacity. 
 
 — gormel, the formula. 
 
 — gorm, the form. 
 
 — greunbtrm, the female 
 
 friend. 
 
 — greunfcfcfyaft, the friend- 
 
 ship. 
 
 — grift, the delay. 
 
 — ®abt, the gift. 
 
 — ©eburt, the birth. 
 
 — ©efafyr, the danger. 
 
 c3 
 
 £)te ©egertb, the country. 
 
 — ©efettfd&aft, the so- 
 
 ciety. 
 
 — ©efralt, the figure. 
 
 — ©liuffeltgfett, the fe- 
 
 licity. 
 
 — igxmblung, the action. 
 
 — ^)eiratl) r the marriage. 
 
 — Sugenb, youth. 
 
 — Simgfet, the virgin. 
 
 — Jforfferfnn, the em- 
 
 press. 
 
 — ^inberet, the child- 
 
 ishness. 
 
 — ^lajfe, the class. 
 
 — jtomgtrm, the queen. 
 
 — jtrartffyett, the illness. 
 
 — Jtugel, the ball. 
 
 — £dd)erltct)fett, the ridi- 
 
 culousness. 
 
 — £eibertfd)afr, the pas- 
 
 sion. 
 
 — Setter, the ladder. 
 
 — fitme, the line. 
 
 — firuftbarfcit, the re- 
 
 joicing, [tion. 
 
 — ^lad)rtc^t,theinforma- 
 
 — 9?acr;ttgatl, the night- 
 ingale. 
 
18 
 
 £)ie station, the nation. 
 
 — 9tatur, the nature. 
 
 — £M)nmad)t, the fainting 
 
 fit. 
 
 — 3)fltd)t, the duty. 
 
 — s ])oefte, the poetry. 
 
 — SPrebigt, the sermon. 
 
 — 9)romn§, the province. 
 
 — Sfceblidjfett, the honesty 
 
 — 9£ofe, the rose. 
 
 — Religion, the religion. 
 
 — ^cfytcfyt, the stratum. 
 
 — ©cfyrift/ the writing. 
 
 — ©d)ulter,the shoulder. 
 
 £)ie ©C^uffel, the dish. 
 
 — <5cfywej!et, the sister. 
 
 — (Stint, the forehead. 
 
 — Saubc, the pigeon. 
 
 — £l)itr, the door. 
 
 — Sugenb, the virtue. 
 
 — 3h;ratmei,the tyranny. 
 
 — Utttoerfttdt, the uni- 
 
 versity. 
 
 — SMmacfyt, the pleni- 
 
 potence. 
 
 — SBelt, the world. 
 
 — 3ett, the time. 
 
 — Sunge, the tongue. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 1. This contains only the two substantives : bte Gutter, 
 the mother ; bte £od)ter, the daughter. They soften in 
 the plural the radical vowels without adding anything 4 . 
 Ex. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 £)te Gutter, the mother. £)te Sautter, the mothers. 
 
 — Softer, the daughter. — Socfyter, the daughters. 
 
 Exception II. 
 
 Contains feminine substantives which add e in all the 
 
 cases of the plural and soften the radical vowels. They are: 
 
 First. The feminine monosyllables containing a or u, Ex. 
 
 N. 
 
 bte %anb, 
 
 the hand. 
 
 bie $&nbe/ the hands. 
 
 G. 
 
 ber. «£anb/ 
 
 of the hand. 
 
 bee £anbe/ of the hands. 
 
 b. 
 
 ber v^anb/ 
 
 to the hand. 
 
 ben^&nben, to the hands. 
 
 A. 
 
 bte v^anbf 
 
 the hand. 
 
 bte £&nbe/ the hands. 
 
 Except the letter n in the dative. 
 
19 
 
 In the same manner are declined : 
 
 £>ie %xt, the axe. 
 
 — SScmf, the bench. 
 
 — S3raut, the bride. 
 
 — S5ruj!, the breast. 
 
 — gauji, the fist. 
 
 — grucfyt, tne fruit* 
 
 — ©an§, the goose. 
 
 — ©ruft, the grave. 
 
 — Qautf the skin. 
 
 — lluft, the cleft, the 
 
 abyss. 
 
 — $raft, the strength. 
 
 — Mvtf), the cow. 
 
 — $tm|f, the art. 
 
 — %au§, the louse. 
 
 — guft, the air. 
 
 SMe Sufi, the joy, the 
 pleasure. 
 
 — SiJlacfyt, the power. 
 
 — 9Jlagt>, the maid-ser- 
 
 vant. 
 
 — $Jlau$, the mouse. 
 
 — s Jkd)t, the night. 
 
 — yiafyt, the seam. 
 
 — 9tug, the nut. 
 
 — @au, the sow. 
 
 — @d)nur, the string. 
 
 — ©cfywutff , the swelling. 
 
 — &tobt, the town. 
 
 — SBanb, the partition. 
 
 — SBurjt, the sausage. 
 
 — 3unft, the guild, &c. 
 
 Second. All feminine substantives ending in nijjL 
 These take e in the plural, but do not soften the radical 
 vowels, as : — 
 
 £>ie SSeforgnijj, the care, 
 the apprehension. 
 
 — SBetrubnig, the afflic- 
 
 tion. 
 
 — (Srlaubnif, the per- 
 
 mission. 
 
 £te ginjfcrnij*, the dark- 
 ness. 
 — JCemxtmjj, the know- 
 ledge. 
 &c. 
 
 Obs. Some feminine monosyllables, though contain- 
 ing one of the vowels a, u, are nevertheless declined like 
 other feminine substantives, L e. they add en in all the 
 
20 
 
 cases plural, and do not soften the radical vowels. They 
 are the following : 
 
 IDte 2Cvt, the kind, the spe- 
 cies. 
 
 — SSafyn, the path. 
 
 — 33urg, the castle. 
 
 — gafyrt, the journey, 
 
 the turn. 
 
 — film, the field. 
 
 — glut!), the flood. 
 
 — Srau, the woman, the 
 
 wife 5 . 
 
 £)te Sagb, the chase, the 
 hunt. 
 
 — £a(l, the burden. 
 
 — Sfttttt, the cipher 
 
 (nought). 
 
 — £lual, the torment. 
 
 — &aat, the seed. 
 
 — ec^lac^t, the battle. 
 
 — @pur, the trace. 
 
 — Xfyat, the deed. 
 
 — 3af)l, the number. 
 
 DIVISION III. 
 
 Declension of Neuter Substantives. 
 
 Rule III. — Neuter substantives are, in the singular, 
 declined like the masculine. They add in all the cases 
 of the plural er, and soften the radical vowels a, 0, U, 
 into a, 6, tu Neuter words ending in el, en, er, do not 
 soften in the plural the radical vowels, except t>a3 
 Jtlojler, the convent. Plur. tie Softer 6 * 
 
 5 See Note 4, Lesson 94, Method, Part I. 
 
 6 It will not be forgotten that neuter nouns ending in el/ en/ et/ 
 d)e n, and let It/ take only g in the genitive singular, and nothing in 
 the plural, except the letter n in the dative of those ending in el/ er. 
 (See Preliminary Obs. B, and Obs A, page 4.) 
 
21 
 
 Examples* 
 
 1. Of a neuter noun either taking e£ or 3 in the ge- 
 nitive singular, and e, or nothing, in the dative 7 . 
 
 Plural, 
 bk Winter/ the children, 
 bet Winter, of the children. 
 
 N. bag £inb, the child. 
 
 G. be6 £inbeg or £tnbg/ of the 
 
 child. 
 D. bem ^inbe or $tnb/ to the 
 
 child. 
 A. bag £inb, the child. 
 
 ben Jtttlbern/ to the children. 
 
 bk ilmber/ the childn 
 
 2. Of a neuter noun changing in the genitive and 
 dative singular, and all the cases plural 3 into f, and 
 softening the radical vowel a into a* 
 
 bie ©lafer, the glasses, 
 
 ber ©l&fer, of the glasses, 
 ben ©Idfern/ to the glasses. 
 bk ©lafer, the glasses. 
 
 3. Of a neuter noun, which in the genitive and 
 dative sing, and all the cases plural changes £ into ff, and 
 softens the radical vowel o into h. 
 
 N. bag ®la$ f the glass. 
 
 G. beg ©lafeg, of the glass. 
 
 D. bem ©la[e, to the glass. 
 
 A. bag ®lag/ the glass. 
 
 N. bag <Sd)tof}/ the castle. 
 
 G. beg (Scbloffeg, of the castle. 
 D. bem <Sd)loffe/ to the castle. 
 A. bag <Sd)lof$/ the castle. 
 
 bk (Sdjloffer/ the castles, 
 
 ber ©d)toffer/ of the castles, 
 ben ©djloffern/ to the castles, 
 bie ©Chloffetv the castles. 
 
 4. Of a neuter noun softening in the plural the 
 radical vowel u into tu 
 
 N. bag Slid)/ the book. 
 
 G. beg S3ud)eg, of the book. 
 
 D. bem SSudje/ to the book. 
 
 A. bag 33ud> the book. 
 
 bk SSficfcef/ the books, 
 
 ber §3ud)er, of the books. 
 
 ben SBuchern/ to the books. 
 
 bie S3ud)er/ the books. 
 
 7 See Obs. A. page 4. 
 
22 
 
 5. Of a neuter noun ending in el, and adding nothing 
 in the plural (Preliminary Obs. B.). 
 
 Singular. 
 N. ba$ ©eget/ the sail. 
 
 G. beg <SegelS/ of the sail. 
 D. bem ©eget/ to the sail. 
 A. ba$ ©egel/ the sail. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 tie ©egel/ the sails, 
 ber ©egel/ of the sails, 
 ben ©egeln/ to the sails, 
 tie @egel/ the sails. 
 
 6. Of a neuter noun which, ending in er, adds nothing 
 in the plural, and does not soften the radical vowel. 
 
 N. ba$ Ufer/ the shore. 
 
 G. be§ Uferg/ of the shore. 
 
 D. bem Ufer, to the shore. 
 
 A. ba$ Ufeo the shore. 
 
 The opposite plate will show the learner how he is to 
 decline the nouns and to write his exercises. 
 
 tie Ufer/ the shores, 
 
 ber Ufer/ of the shores, 
 
 ben Ufern/ to the shores, 
 
 bie Ufer/ the shores. 
 
 NEUTER SUBSTANTIVES, 
 
 To serve as examples to the preceding Rules. 
 
 3}a§ 2ttmofen, the alms. 
 
 2>a$ matt, the leaf. 
 
 — Zltixfyum, the anti- 
 
 — SSrctt, the board. 
 
 quity. 
 
 — S5unbe(, the bundle. 
 
 — %\nt, the employment. 
 
 — &ati), the roof. 
 
 — 25ab, the bath. 
 
 — £)en!maat 8 / the monu- 
 
 — 33ant>, the ribbon. 
 
 ment. 
 
 — SBauet, the cage. 
 
 — Sorf, the village. 
 
 — SSecfen, the basin. 
 
 — (£t, the egg. 
 
 — 33tlt>, the image, the 
 
 — (Stfen, the iron. 
 
 print. 
 
 — (Srempet, the example. 
 
 — SSiStfyum, the bishop- 
 
 — gacfy, the compart- 
 
 ric. 
 
 ment. 
 
 See Obs. C. page 5. 
 
3 § 
 
 
 i i 
 
 i $s ! K x 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ J X 
 
 4 „J .. 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 u 
 
 "1- I 
 
 ^N 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ ;V' nJ >| 
 
 - c .. .i 
 H S§ S§ \s 
 
 
 J ^N <L 
 
 S k 
 
 ^ ^ ^ 
 * 
 
 is- 
 
 ^ aj 5| a| 
 
 a I5| a 
 
 * - 
 
 X^i' ^ 
 
23 
 
 £)a§ gafi, the cask. 
 _ gelt>, the field. 
 
 — genper, the window. 
 
 — geuer, the fire. 
 
 — grdulein, the young 
 
 lady. 
 
 — gull en, the colt. 
 
 — gut jlentfyum, the prin- 
 
 cipality. 
 
 — ©ebrecfyen, the infirm- 
 
 ity. 
 
 — ©eldnber, the rail. 
 
 — ©elb, the money. 
 
 — ©emacfy, the apart- 
 
 ment. 
 
 — ©emutl), the mind. 
 
 — ©efd)led)t, the gender, 
 
 the race. 
 
 — ©eftcbt, the face. 
 
 — ©efpenjl, the ghost, 
 
 the phantom. 
 
 — ©ewanb, the garment. 
 
 — ©ettriffen, the con- 
 
 science. 
 
 — ©emitter, the storm. 
 
 — ©eroolbe 9 , the vault, 
 
 the shop. 
 
 — ©lieb, the limb, the 
 
 member. 
 
 — ©rab, the tomb. 
 
 T>a§ ©ra§, the grass. 
 
 — Q$ut, the property, 
 
 the estate. 
 
 — $aupt, the head, the 
 
 chief. 
 
 — SpauS, the house. 
 
 — ^er50gtl)um,the duchy. 
 
 — «£)0l§, the wood. 
 
 — ^orn, the horn. 
 
 — ■ ^ufyn, the fowl, the 
 hen. 
 
 — &alb, the calf. 
 
 — itapttel, the chapter. 
 
 — Emblem, the little 
 
 child. 
 
 — jlletb, the coat, the 
 
 gown. 
 
 — ^orn, the grain. 
 
 — Jfraut, the herb, the 
 
 plant. 
 
 — ^Upfer, the copper. 
 
 — ^liffen, the cushion. 
 
 — 2amm, the lamb. 
 
 — Sanb, the land. 
 
 — £ajler, the vice. 
 
 — Seber, the leather. 
 
 — £td)t, the light. 
 
 — £ieb, the song. 
 
 — Socfy, the hole. 
 
 — SDMbcfyen, the girl. 
 
 9 Having already ti takes only r. 
 
24 
 
 £>a§ $flaal, the mark. 
 
 — SDfcaul, the mouth, the 
 
 muzzle. 
 
 — SDteffer, the knife. 
 
 — Wlitttl, the means. 
 
 — 5D?ujIer, the pattern. 
 
 — Sftejt, the nest. 
 
 — IDpfer, the sacrifice. 
 
 — £)rafe(, the oracle. 
 
 — SPfanb, the pawn, the 
 
 pledge. 
 
 — ^Pufoet, the powder. 
 
 — 9ft ab, the wheel. 
 
 — etatt)fel, the riddle. 
 
 — Regiment, the regi- 
 
 ment. 
 — - SfteiS, the twig. 
 
 — Sfttnb, the horned cat- 
 
 tle. 
 
 £)a$ Sfcuber, the oar. 
 
 — (2d)tlb, the signboard. 
 
 — <Sd)tt>ert, the sword. 
 
 — (Stegel, the seal. 
 
 — ©pttal, the hospital. 
 
 — @tift, the foundation. 
 
 — Xfyat, the valley. 
 
 — Sweater, the theatre. 
 
 — S£ud), the cloth. 
 
 — Uebel, the evil. 
 
 — SSolf, the people. 
 
 — SBapen, the coat of 
 
 arms. 
 
 — SSeib, the woman 10 . 
 
 — SBort, the word. 
 
 — SBunber, the wonder. 
 
 — Seicfyen, the sign. 
 
 — 3elt, the tent. 
 
 — Simmer, the room. 
 
 EXCEPTION. 
 
 This contains all the neuter nouns which take in the 
 plural e \ without softening the radical vowels, viz. : — 
 
 First. All neuter nouns derived from verbs and be- 
 ginning with the syllable ge. Ex. : — 
 
 £)a§ ©ebet, the prayer, from the verb beten, to pray. 
 
 10 See Note 4, Lesson 94, Method, Part I. 
 
 1 Those that have an e in the singular do not take an additional one in 
 the plural. Ex. -.—baS ©emdlbe/ the picture ; Plural, tie ©em&lbe, the 
 pictures. 
 
25 
 
 Singular. 
 N. ba$ ©ebetr the prayer. 
 
 G. beg ©cbetes or @ebet§, of 
 
 the praye 
 D. bem ©ebete or ©ebet, to the 
 
 prayer. 
 A. bas ©ebet/ the prayer. 
 
 tie ©ebete/ 
 In the same manner are declined : — 
 
 Plural. 
 bte (3ebttif the prayers, 
 ber ©ebete/ of the prayers. 
 
 tin ©ebeten/ to the prayers. 
 
 the prayers. 
 
 £>a§ ©elenf, the joint. 
 
 — ©emdlbe 2 , the picture. 
 
 — ®ettd/t, the court of 
 
 justice. 
 
 — ©efcfyenf , the present. 
 
 — ©efcfydft, the business. 
 
 — ©efcfyiebe 3 , the re- 
 peated shoving. 
 
 £)a$ ©effect, the vision. 
 
 — ©efptdci), the dialogue. 
 
 — ©efttcfy, the request. 
 
 — ©etrdnf, the beverage. 
 
 — (Bewebe 4 , the tissue. 
 
 — ©ett)e!)t, the weapon. 
 
 — ©ettmrj, the spice. 
 
 — ©ejdnf, the quarrel- 
 ling, &c. 
 
 — ©efd)u£, the artillery. 
 
 Second. All the neuter substantives terminating in 
 nti, as : — 
 
 ©a3 2Cergenug, the scan- 
 dal, the vexation. 
 
 — 33eburfnt£, the want. 
 
 — ©ebdcfytmf*, the me- 
 
 mory. 
 
 £>a3 (^efyetmmf?, the secret. 
 
 — ©leicfytttg, the simile. 
 
 — Settgnif}, the testi- 
 
 mony. 
 &c. 
 
 Third. Neuter words derived from foreign languages 
 and terminating in ertt. Ex. : — 
 
 N J sing. fc>aS Argument, the argument; pi. bte 2(rgu= 
 A.J mente. 
 
 2 See the preceding Note. 3 See Note 1, preceding page. 
 
 4 See Note 1, preceding page. 
 
26 
 
 In the same manner must be declined : 
 
 £aS @ompltment, the com- 
 pliment. 
 
 — (demerit, the element. 
 
 — (££pettment, the expe- 
 
 riment. 
 
 £)aS Snjlrument, the in- 
 strument. 
 — Sejlamertt, the testa- 
 ment. 
 &c. 
 
 Obs. From this last rule must be excepted the two 
 substantives: t>a3 ^Patlamertt, tne parliament; ba§ SKegu 
 merit, the regiment, which take, like other neuter words, 
 er in all the cases plural. T>a§ $)arlament, being of fo- 
 reign origin, must not be softened. (See infra page 28.) 
 
 Fourth. The following 
 
 £)a§ SBanb, the tie. 
 
 — 35 em, the leg. 
 
 — 33ter, the beer. 
 
 — 33rofc>, the bread. 
 
 — £>ing, the thing, 
 
 — gell, the hide. 
 
 — ©am, the yarn. 
 • — ©ebiet, the district. 
 
 — ©efdg, the vessel. 
 
 — ©efyirn, the brain. 
 
 — ©erdtfy, the furniture, 
 
 — ©ettcfyt, the dish, the 
 
 mess. 
 
 — ©efcfyitr, the vessel. 
 
 — ©efcfyrour, the abscess. 
 
 neuter substantives : 
 
 £)a§ ©efe£, the law. 
 
 — ©eroeif), the horns. 
 
 — ©tft, the poison. 
 
 — Sbaax, the hair. 
 
 — £eer, the army. 
 
 — Safyr, the year. 
 
 — 3ocfy, the yoke. 
 
 — Stabixiltt, the cabinet. 
 
 — ^ameel, the camel. 
 
 — itme 5 , the knee. 
 
 — Stxtufa the cross. 
 
 — £oo3, the lot. 
 
 — Sitteer, the sea. 
 
 — Wldall, the metal. 
 
 — SRefe, the net. 
 
 5 The word ^nic adds nothing in the plural, but is pronounced as if it 
 took an C. 
 
27 
 
 £)a3 tyaax, the pair. 
 
 — papier, the paper. 
 
 — $Pferb, the horse. 
 
 — SPfimb, the pound. 
 
 — Sfcecfct, the right. 
 
 — SRtiti), the empire. 
 
 — Sftofyr, the reed, the 
 
 cane, the pipe. 
 
 — 3£o$/ the horse. 
 
 — <&al}j, the salt. 
 
 — ©cfyaf/ the sheep. 
 
 £)a£ <3d)tff, the ship. 
 
 — ©d)tt>ein, the pig, the 
 
 — <5etl, the rope, [swine. 
 
 — ©pi el, the play. 
 
 — Sfyter, the animal. 
 
 — Sfyor, the gate. 
 
 — SBerbienjf, the merit. 
 
 — SBcrf, the work. 
 
 — 2Bort, the word 
 
 (speech). 
 
 — 3tel, the aim. 
 
 Observations. 
 
 A. The word ba$ S5oot, the boat, is in the plural bte S3ote, 
 jB. Nine neuter substantives have e n in the plural. 
 
 They do not soften the vowels, and those that have 
 
 already e take only n. They are : — 
 
 £)aS 2£u<je, the eye. 
 
 — S5ctt, the bed. 
 
 — @nbe, the extremity, 
 
 the end. 
 
 — ©ttebmaf?, the limb. 
 
 £)a3 v^emb, the shirt. 
 
 — *§et5 6 , the heart. 
 
 — Snfcct, the insect. 
 
 — &tyt, the ear. 
 
 — SBer; 7 , the woe. 
 
 C. £)a3 .ftlemob, the jewel, adds in the plural ten, 
 thus : bte ^(etnobten, the jewels. 
 
 Of the Declension 
 
 Of words derived from Foreign Languages. 
 It has been seen above, 1. that masculine substan- 
 
 6 £)ClS £ er 5' tne heart, takes e n g in the genitive, and e n in the dative 
 singular. 
 
 7 £)a§ SSkfo/ the woe, is employed in the plural only to denote the 
 pangs of childbirth. 
 
 d2 
 
28 
 
 fives of foreign origin, and terminating in: ant, ax&), 
 at, exit, e t, i % it, 0, (Exception II. class 2.), take 
 ett in all the cases singular and plural : 2. that such as 
 end in or (Exception III. class 1.), have en in all the 
 cases plural; 3. that all foreign feminine words adopted 
 into German (declension of feminine substantives) take 
 e n or n in all the cases plural ; 4. that neuter foreign 
 words terminating in ent (Exception class 3.) have e in 
 all the cases plural. Let us, in addition, notice : — 
 
 First. That nouns derived from foreign languages do 
 not soften the radical vowels in the plural (except t>a$ 
 @f)0r, the chorus; plur. Me ®(}6re* 
 
 Second. That foreign words following the declension 
 of masculine substantives (gen. 3, plur. e) are : — 
 
 a) those masculine and neuter foreign substantives 
 which terminate in : a I, an, in, on, ar, em, om, am/ 
 a mm, and the neuter terminating in at. Ex. : — 
 
 Plural. 
 tie Originate, the originals. 
 
 Singular. 
 A * j>baS Original, the original. 
 
 G. beg Originals, of the original. 
 D. bem Original/ to the original. 
 
 ber Originate, of the originals, 
 ben Originalen, to the originals. 
 
 In the same manner are declined : 
 
 £>a§ Stneat, the ruler. 
 £)er D^ean, the ocean. 
 
 — liltaxi, the balcony. 
 
 — ^amin, the chimney. 
 
 — Sftubm, the ruby. 
 
 — $Pojntlon, the post-boy. 
 
 — Qanton, the canton. 
 £)aS Qinmplax, the copy. 
 
 £)a3 £)tabem, the diadem. 
 
 — £)tplom, the diploma. 
 £)er S5alfam, the balsam. 
 £)aS (Spicpamm, the epi- 
 gram. 
 
 — Qtfyoxat, the ephorat. 
 &c. 
 
29 
 
 The following words are exceptions to this rule : 
 
 Singular. 
 
 ©a3 Capital, the capital 
 (stock). 
 
 — Capital, the capital (in 
 
 architecture). 
 
 — SDltnerat, the mineral. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 ©ie ^apttaitert, the capitals 
 
 (stocks). 
 — ^apttdler, the capitals. 
 
 — Sftegal, the regalia. 
 b) Those ending in el, er 8 , as 
 
 — SOftneralten, the mine- 
 
 rals. 
 
 — SRegalten, the regalia. 
 
 ©a§ CSfrempel, the example. 
 
 — $apitel, the chapter. 
 ©er 2Craber, the Arab. 
 
 — (Sngldnber, the En- 
 
 glishman. 
 
 — ©panier, the Spaniard. 
 
 ©er £>ijtortfer, the histo- 
 rian. 
 
 — .ftalenber, the almanac. 
 
 — Staliener, the Italian. 
 ©a3 Svegtjler, the register. 
 
 &c. 
 
 Obs. The word t>et &>axdttx, the character, is in the 
 plural : bie (Sfyaraftere. 
 
 c) Words taken from the French, when they are pro- 
 nounced like German words. Ex. : — 
 
 Singular. 
 ber Officter, the officer, 
 
 beg £)fftcterg/ of the officer, 
 bem £>jfirier/ to the officer, 
 
 ben £)fftcier, the officer. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 bte £)fftcteve, 
 
 bet ©fftctere, 
 
 ben £)fftcteren, 
 
 bte £)fftctere, 
 
 the officers, 
 of the officers. 
 to the officers. 
 
 the officers. 
 
 In the same manner must be declined : 
 
 ©er 2£ccort>, the accord. 
 
 ©er SSattferott, the bank- 
 ruptcy. 
 
 8 It will be remembered that they remain invariable in the plural. (See 
 Preliminary Obs. B.) 
 
 d3 
 
30 
 
 £)a$ S3iUet 9 , the note. 
 
 — (Concert, the concert. 
 Der Courier, the courier. 
 
 — gourter, the quarter- 
 
 master. 
 
 £)er guftUer, the fusiher. 
 — (Srenabier, the grena- 
 dier. 
 Da3 portrait, the portrait. 
 &c. 
 
 B. When French words which have retained their 
 original pronunciation, are used in German, they take 3 
 in the genitive singular and in all the cases plural. 
 Ex.:— 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 N. ber 2Ccteur, the actor. tie #cteur§, the actors. 
 
 G. be6 2fcteucS/ of the actor. ber 2CcteurS, of the actors. 
 
 D. bem 2tcteur/ to the actor. ben 2tcteur£, to the actors. 
 
 A. be^»2Ccteur/ the actor. bte 2CcteutS/ the actors. 
 
 In the same manner are declined : 
 £)er 2£ubtteur, the auditor. 
 
 — SSalhYi, the balcony. 
 
 — (Sfyef, the chief. 
 ■ — Qorbort, the cordon. 
 
 £)a§ @0tp$, the corps. 
 
 — Detail, the detail. 
 £)er grifeur, the hair- 
 dresser. 
 
 Da§ ©outtemement, the 
 government. 
 
 £)er Sttcjenieur, the en- 
 gineer. 
 
 £)a£ Sftanotter, the man- 
 oeuvre. 
 
 £)er SDZineur, the miner. 
 
 — 9)ortter, the porter. 
 £)er (Soutierain, the sove- 
 reign. 
 
 — tambour, the drum- 
 mer. 
 
 &c. 
 
 C. The German declension is especially applicable to 
 such foreign nouns as have adopted a German termina- 
 tion, or have at least lost their foreign appearance ; but 
 all those which have retained their original form, as : ber 
 9ttuftCU§, the musician ; ber SttebtcuS, the physician ; ber 
 
 9 £)a6 SSttlet doubles the t in the plural, thus, SSiUette. 
 
Singular. 
 
 i>a$ (Sarmetv the poem. 
 
 31 
 
 (5afu§/ the case ; ba$ barmen, the poem ; baS factum, the 
 fact ; ba$ S()ema, the theme, &c, do not fall within the 
 German declension. They may, however, be declined 
 in the singular like German nouns. Examples : — 
 
 Singular. 
 N. ter 9ftujtCU§/ the musician. 
 G. be§ SEftuftCUS/ of the musician. 
 D. bem SOluftCUS/ to the musician. 
 A. ben SSftuftCUS/ the musician. 
 
 N. ba$ ©tjmnajtum/ the gymna- 
 sium. 
 G. beg ®)omnajtum§/ of the gym- 
 nasium. 
 D. bem ©pmnafiuni/ to the gym- 
 nasium. 
 A. ba% ®r>mna(tum/ the gymna- 
 sium. 
 
 Those to whom these explanations may not seem 
 sufficient, should learn to decline such nouns according 
 to the languages to which they belong, or at least 
 notice their nominative plural which then remains in- 
 variable. Ex.: SOJuftci, SDftebict, GafuS, (Satmina, gacta, 
 £f)emata, &c. Many foreign nouns in urn, however, 
 form already their plural in c n, such as : 
 
 be§ (garment 
 bem G>armeti/ 
 ba$ (Sarmen/ 
 
 ba§ Sterna, 
 beg Sfyemag, 
 bem Sfyema, 
 ba$ Sterna/ 
 
 of the poem. 
 
 to the poem. 
 
 the poem. 
 
 the theme, 
 of the theme, 
 to the theme. 
 
 the theme. 
 
 £)a6 Sttbttttbimm, the indi- 
 vidual. 
 
 — QfoangeUum, the gos- 
 
 pel. 
 
 — ©tymnaftum, the gym- 
 
 nasium. 
 
 — ^rtttctytttm, the prin- 
 
 ciple. 
 
 £)te Snbtotbuen, the indi- 
 viduals. 
 
 — ^^angelten, the gos- 
 
 pels. 
 
 — dfymrtaften, the gym- 
 
 nasia. 
 
 — SPrmcipien, the prin- 
 
 ciples. 
 
32 
 
 Singular. 
 
 £)a3 SSetbum, the verb. 
 
 — #btierbtum, the adverb. 
 
 — ©emtnarmm, the se- 
 
 minary. 
 
 — <Stubium, the study. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 £)te SScrben, the verbs. 
 
 — 2Cbttetbten, the adverbs. 
 
 — ©emmarien, the semi- 
 
 naries. 
 
 — ©tubicn, the studies. 
 
 Additional Observations. 
 
 A. Some substantives of the same consonance vary 
 often in their gender and plural, according to their 
 different signification. As it is very important that the 
 pupils should be made acquainted with them, we present 
 here a complete list of them. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 ■Der SBanb, the volume. 
 £>a$ 83anb, the tie. 
 
 — S3anb, the ribbon. 
 £)te S3anf, the bench. 
 
 — SSanf, the bank. 
 £)er SSauer, the peasant. 
 £>a$ 33 auer, the cage. 
 £)et SSucfel, the hump. 
 £)te SSucfel, the stud. 
 £)a£ £)tng, the thing. 
 
 — £>tng, the little girl. 
 £)et ©etpel, the hostage. 
 £)ie ©etgel, the scourge. 
 
 — (gift, the gift. 
 £)a$ ©ift, the poison. 
 
 — ©eftcfyt, the vision. 
 
 — ©eftcfyt, the face. 
 
 £)te SSdnbe. 
 
 — SBanbe. 
 
 — 33dnber. 
 
 — S3dnfe. 
 
 — 33anfen. 
 
 — 33auetn. 
 
 — SSauer. 
 
 — SSucfel. 
 
 — SSucfein. 
 
 — Dtnge. 
 
 — Dinger. 
 
 — ©eifkl. 
 
 — ©etgeln. 
 
 — ©tften. 
 
 — ©tfte. 
 
 — ©ejtcfyte. 
 
 — ©ejtcfyter. 
 
33 
 
 £>er ^anbel, the trade. Has no plural. 
 
 — |)anbet, the quarrel. £)te ^dttbeL 
 
 — £etbe, the pagan. — $etben, 
 £)te $etbe, the heath. — #eibeiu 
 £)et |mt, the hat. — |>ute. 
 £)te £mt, the pasture. — $uten. 
 £)er liefer, the jaw-bone. — liefer. 
 £)te liefer, the pine. — ^tefern. 
 £)er itunbe, the customer. — ,&imberu 
 £>te itunbe, the knowledge. — itunben. 
 £)er Setter, the guide. — Setter* 
 £)te Setter, the ladder. — Seitern. 
 £)er Saben, the shop. — Sdben. 
 
 — Sabett, the shutter. — Sabem 
 £>a§ Sartb, the territory, the land — Sanbe. 
 
 — Sanb, the country. — Sdnber* 
 
 — Stcfyt, the candle. — £td)te. 
 
 — Stcfyt, the light. — Stater. 
 £)te 5Q?anbel, the almond. — SDZanbeln. 
 £)a£ Sftanbel, the number of fifteen. — Sftanbel. 
 £)te Sttarf, the mark (a weight). — Sftarfen. 
 £)a£ Sfftarf, the marrow. Has no plural. 
 £)et 9ttajt, the mast. £)ie 9ttajlen. 
 £)te $Sta% the mast (feeding). Has no plural. 
 £)et £)rt, the place, the region. £)te £)rtc* 
 
 — iDrt, the defined place. — better* 
 
 — @d)t(b, the shield. — @d)ilbe. 
 £a3 @d)tlb,the signboard. — ©cfytlber. 
 £)et (See, the lake. — (Seen* 
 £te (See, the sea. — (Seen. 
 
34 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 £>et ©ptoffe, the germin, the shoot. 
 
 £>ie ©ptoffen 
 
 £)ie ©proffe, the step, the degree. 
 
 — ©proffen 
 
 £)er @tift, the tag. 
 
 — ©tifte. 
 
 £)aS @tift, the foundation. 
 
 — ©tifter. 
 
 £>et @trau£, the nosegay. 
 
 — ©ttdttge. 
 
 — ©trauf?, the ostrich. 
 
 — ©traufk. 
 
 — SEfyor, the fool. 
 
 — Sfyoren. 
 
 £>a§ Xfyox, the gate. 
 
 — £f)ore. 
 
 — SBort, the word (speech 10 ). 
 
 — SBorte. 
 
 — SBort, the word. 
 
 — Sorter. 
 
 £)et 3oE, the inch. 
 
 — Solle. 
 
 — Soil, the toll. 
 
 — Solle. 
 
 B. Abstract substantives have generally no plural in 
 German, as : — 
 
 £>te ©ute, the goodness, 
 the bounty. 
 — Stebe, love. 
 
 £)er $a% hatred. 
 £)te (Scfyanbe, shame. 
 &c. 
 
 C. Collective nouns generally form their plural by 
 adding the word 3Crten, sorts, species, to the singular, as 
 if we said : various sorts of. Ex. : — 
 
 Singular. 
 
 £>a$ ©etretbe, the corn. 
 — £)bjl, the fruit. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 £Me ©etreibearten. 
 — £>bj!arten. 
 
 D. £)er grteben, peace, has in the plural bte griebenS^ 
 fcfytuffe ; ba$ SSergnugen, the pleasure, has either SSergnu- 
 gltrtgett, or forms its plural regularly. 
 
 10 See Note I, Lesson 51, Method, Part 1. 
 
35 
 
 DIVISION IV. 
 
 Of the Declension of Proper Nouns. 
 
 Proper nouns are either the names of countries, towns, 
 and villages, or the names of persons. The latter only 
 will here be spoken of, as the former are generally in- 
 declinable. (See Meth. Part I., Lesson li.) 
 
 As regards the names of persons, they are declined 
 either with the article or without it. With the article 
 the names themselves remain uninflected throughout all 
 the cases ; without the article they are declined in the 
 following manner : 
 
 The names of men take § in the genitive, e It in the 
 dative and accusative, and the names of women change 
 a or e (the common endings of almost all such names) 
 in the genitive into e n 3, and in the dative and accusa- 
 tive into e n. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 Masculine. Feminine. 
 
 N. Rath Charles. 
 
 G. tfctrlS/ of Charles. 
 
 D. £ar.le rw to Charles. 
 
 A. .Karl en, Charles. 
 
 ataxia f 
 Siemens, 
 #flaxi e n , 
 93tctrt e n , 
 
 Mary, 
 of Mary, 
 to Mary. 
 
 Mary. 
 
 N. #etnrtdEv 
 G. £etnrtd)§/ 
 D. £etnrid) e n f 
 A. $einrid)en, 
 
 Henry, 
 of Henry, 
 to Henry. 
 
 Henry. 
 
 Carotin e , Caroline. 
 
 Caroline n6/ of Caroline. 
 Caroline tl, to Caroline. 
 Caroline X\, Caroline. 
 
 Observations. 
 
 A. Names of men ending in r, take only n in the 
 dative and accusative. 
 
36 
 
 
 
 Examples. 
 
 
 
 Masculine 
 
 
 
 feminine. 
 
 N. 
 
 *Peter, 
 
 Peter. 
 
 2Heranber, 
 
 Alexander. 
 
 G. 
 
 speter § / 
 
 of Peter. 
 
 2Clo:ariber g , 
 
 of Alexander. 
 
 D. 
 
 $)eter n , 
 
 to Peter. 
 
 2Ueranber n 
 
 t to Alexander. 
 
 A. 
 
 ^>etet n , 
 
 Peter. 
 
 2ner.anbern/ 
 
 Alexander. 
 
 B. Names of men ending in fd), 3, ff, fj, £, &, take ens 
 in the genitive. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 N. granj, 
 
 Francis. 
 
 grffti 
 
 Frederic. 
 
 G. granjen6, 
 
 of Francis. 
 
 grt$enS, 
 
 of Frederic. 
 
 D. granj en, 
 
 to Francis. 
 
 grt|en, 
 
 to Frederic. 
 
 A. graven, 
 
 Francis. 
 
 grt§en, 
 
 Frederic. 
 
 C. Diminutive names of persons, which invariably 
 end in cfyen, follow the rule of this termination in the 
 declension of common nouns, namely, they take only § 
 in the genitive, nothing in the dative and accusative. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 N. v£anSd)en, 
 G. Jp&nSdjenS, 
 D. £&n£d)en, 
 A. £an§d)en, 
 
 Jacky. 
 of Jacky. 
 to Jacky. 
 
 Jacky. 
 
 £dti)d)en, 
 «Kdti)d)en, 
 
 Kate, 
 of Kate, 
 to Kate. 
 
 Kate. 
 
 Decline according to the preceding rules and examples. 
 
 Subttrig, Lewis. 
 33ertu)atb, Bernard. 
 Sfyeobor, Theodore. 
 £an§, Jack. 
 ©eorgcfyen, Georgy. 
 
 Maxa, Clare. 
 Matyaxinz, Catherine. 
 ©tetcfyen, Peggy. 
 @u§d)en, Sukey. 
 9£o3d)en, Rose. 
 
37 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 Of the Gender of Substantives. 
 
 Almost all the German grammarians have given rules 
 on the gender of substantives ; but these rules are, for 
 the most part, so confused and incomplete that even the 
 most intelligent pupil could not avail himself of them. 
 I confess it is extremely difficult to reduce this part 
 of the grammar to fixed rules ; for the first gramma- 
 rians, in determining the gender of nouns, have dis- 
 tributed them very arbitrarily and according to very 
 obscure analogies. If, therefore, I have not completely 
 succeeded, I think at least I have, by dint of reflection, 
 been able to establish rules which will be found sure 
 and intelligible. I moreover believe I have given nearly 
 all the exceptions to the principles I have laid down, 
 which former grammarians have entirely neglected to 
 do for those which they had established. 
 
 The sender of substantives is known : 
 
 First, By their meaning. 
 
 Second. By their termination. 
 
 With respect to their meaning, the following rules 
 may be established. 
 
38 
 
 I. Of the Masculine Gender are : — 
 
 First. All substantives representing male individuals. 
 This class comprises the name of the Supreme Being, 
 and the names of intermediate intelligent beings. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 £)er $Rann, the man. 
 — SSater, the father. 
 
 £)er SBrubet, the brother. 
 — itontg, the king, &c. 
 
 Second. The names of the winds, seasons, months, 
 and days. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 £)er @ub, the South. 
 
 — 9lort>, the North. 
 
 — @ommer, the summer. 
 
 — £Bmter, the winter. 
 
 £)er 9ftdr&, March. 
 
 — Sanuar, January. 
 
 — ©onntag, Sunday. 
 
 — SOlontag, Monday, &c. 
 
 II. Of the Feminine Gender are : — 
 
 First. All words designating a female being. This 
 class comprises the names of the goddesses. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 £)te £)td)tertnn, the poetess. 
 SSenu§, Venus, &c. 
 
 £)te gratt, the woman. 
 
 — flutter, the mother. 
 
 — <Sd)tt>ejIer, the sister. 
 
 There are to be excepted : 
 £)a3 5!ftdt>d)en, the girl. | £a§ £$etb, the woman. 
 
 Second. The names of flowers and fruits. 
 Examples. 
 £>te 9telfe, the pink. | £)ie Btofe, the rose. 
 
39 
 
 Die Sftarciffe, the narcissus. 
 
 — SEufye, the tulip. 
 
 — 33im, the pear. 
 
 — 2CpfcIftnc, the orange. 
 
 Let us except : — 
 
 Det 2fyfel, the apple. 
 DaS 33eitd)en (it being a 
 
 diminutive), the 
 
 violet. 
 
 Die SPftrjtcfye, the peach. 
 
 — (Sitrone, the lemon. 
 
 — jttrfcfye, the cherry, 
 
 &c. 
 
 Da3 IBercjtgmdnmcfyt (this 
 being three words 
 taken substantive- 
 ly x ), the forget-me- 
 not. 
 
 III. Of the Neuter Gender are : — 
 
 First, All the letters of the alphabet. 
 Examples. 
 
 Da3 %, the A. 
 — S3, the B. 
 
 Second. The names of metals. 
 Examples, 
 
 2>a§ (5, the C, &c 
 
 Da§ (Stfert, the iron. 
 — ©olb, the gold. 
 
 Da3 JSupfer, the copper, 
 — 3mtt, the tin, &c. 
 
 From this rule must be excepted the following 
 words : — 
 
 Der Cobalt, the cobalt. 
 
 — ©tafyl, the steel. 
 Die platina 2 , the platina. 
 
 Der Sombacf, the pinch- 
 beck. 
 
 — SBtf mutf), the bismuth. 
 
 — 3tnf, the zinc. 
 
 See infra, page 49. 
 
 2 Also bdS tylatin, the platina. 
 
 e2 
 
40 
 
 Third. The names of countries and towns, as : — 
 Sonbon, London. 
 
 (gnglanb, England. 
 granfreid), France. 
 £)eutfd)lant>, Germany 
 
 $Part§, Paris. 
 ^Berlin, Berlin, &c. 
 
 Exceptions to this rule are : — 
 
 £)te ittimm, Crimea. 
 ■ — tofffe, Lusatia. 
 — m<xtt, March. 
 
 &ie 9ttott>au, Moldavia. 
 
 — 9>fal§, Palatinate. 
 
 — ©cfywet^, Switzerland. 
 
 And all names of countries terminating in e t, as : — 
 £)te Sutfei, Turkey. | £)te ^ailacfyet,Wallachia,&c. 
 
 Fourth. Nouns beginning with the syllable ge. 
 Examples. 
 
 £)aS ©efufyl, the feeling. 
 
 — ©ettmfyl, the throng. 
 
 — ©emutmel, the mur- 
 
 muring. 
 
 The following Nouns are 
 
 Der ©ebraucf), the use. 
 
 — ©ebanfe, the thought. 
 
 — ©efallen, the favour. 
 
 — ©efyorfam, obedience. 
 
 — ©enug, enjoyment. 
 
 — ©efang, the singing. 
 
 — ©mnnn, the profit. 
 £)ie ©eberbe, the gesture. 
 
 — ©ebufyr, the due, the 
 
 fee. 
 
 2)a§ ©ewotf, the clouds. 
 
 — ©e^dnf, the quarrel- 
 
 ing. 
 
 — ©efprdcfy, the dialogue, 
 
 &c. 
 
 exceptions to this rule. 
 
 £)te ©ebutt, the birth. 
 
 — ©et>ttlt>, patience. 
 
 — ©efafyr, the danger. 
 
 — ©egenb, the country. 
 
 — ©ecjemrart, the pre- 
 
 sence. 
 
 — ©efcfyttmlfr, the swell- 
 
 ing. 
 
 — ©ejlalt, the figure. 
 
 — ©ewalt, the power. 
 
41 
 
 Fifth, Words expressing abstract ideas. They are 
 adjectives taken substantively, as : — 
 
 £)a§ ©d)6ne, the beautiful. I £)a§ ^ngenefyme, the agree- 
 able, &c. 
 Sixth. Common names designating a whole species, 
 without regard to sex, as : — 
 
 £)aS Mint), the child. | £)a3 £f)ter, the animal, &c. 
 
 As for determining the gender of substantives by 
 their termination the following rules may be established. 
 
 I. Masculine are : — 
 First. Derived substantives terminating in el 3 . 
 Examples. 
 
 £>er 2fyfel, the apple. 
 
 — £ebel, the lever. 
 
 — WaQd, the nail. 
 
 — Mantel, the cloak. 
 
 £)et Spiegel, the bolt. 
 — €tytegel, the looking- 
 glass, &c. 
 
 Exceptions to this rule are :- 
 a) The following feminine nouns. 
 
 2)k 2Cd>fet, the shoulder. 
 
 — 2Cmpel 4 , the lamp. 
 
 — 2Cmfe(, the blackbird. 
 
 — 2Cngel, the fishing- 
 
 hook. 
 
 — 2£ffel, the wood-louse. 
 
 — SSibel, the Bible. 
 
 £)te SSre^el, the cracknel. 
 
 — £)etd)fel, the pole (of 
 
 a carriage). 
 
 — £>tfM, the thistle. 
 
 — £)rojTel, the thrush. 
 
 — (Stcfyei, the acorn. 
 
 — Sacf el, the torch. 
 
 3 See Method Part II. page 3. 
 
 4 Corruption of Sampe. 
 
 e3 
 
42 
 
 Die geffel, the fetter. 
 
 — gtbel, the primer. 
 
 — gtebel, the fiddle. 
 
 — ©abcl r the fork. 
 
 — ©eifjel, the scourge. 
 
 — ©urgel, the throat. 
 
 — ^ecfyet, the hatchel. 
 
 — pummel, the drone. 
 
 — jtacfyel, the Dutch tile. 
 
 — ^an^el, the pulpit. 
 
 — ^artoffel, the potatoe. 
 
 — itugel, the ball, the 
 
 bowl. 
 
 — ^urbel, the winch. 
 
 — Sftanbel, the almond. 
 
 — Mangel, the mangle. 
 
 — SDti§pel,the medlar. 
 
 — tylifittt the mistletoe. 
 
 — 5D£otcfyel, the moril. 
 
 — SlJtoftyel, the shell. 
 
 — iRabel, the needle. 
 
 — Sfteffet, the nettle. 
 
 — Stub el, the vermicelli. 
 
 — IDrgel, the organ. 
 
 — SPrimel, the primrose. 
 
 — SfcaSpel, the rasp. 
 
 Die 9toffel, the rattle. 
 
 — Svofyrbommel, the bit- 
 
 tern. 
 
 — (Scfyacfytet, the box. 
 
 — ©djaufel, the shovel. 
 
 — @cf)auf el, the swing. 
 
 — @dj)inbel, the shingle. 
 
 — ©icfyel, the sickle. 
 
 — ©cfyuffel, the dish. 
 
 — ©emmel, the roll. 
 
 — ©ptnbel, the spindle. 
 
 — ©taffel, the step, the 
 
 degree. 
 
 — ©toppel, the stubble. 
 
 — ©triegel, the horse- 
 
 comb. 
 
 — Safel, the table. 
 
 — trommel, the drum. 
 
 — ^ruffel, the truffle. 
 
 — SBacfytel, the quail. 
 
 — SSaffel, the wafer, (a 
 
 cake) . 
 
 — SBinb el/the swaddling- 
 
 cloth. 
 
 — SBurjel, the root. 
 
 — Srotebel, the onion. 
 
 h) The names of rivers having this ending, as : — 
 
 Die SRofel, the Moselle. I T>k 2Beid)fel, the Vistula, 
 
 &c. 
 
43 
 
 c) The following neuter substantives t — ■ 
 
 £)a3 SSunbel, the bundle. 
 
 — £)tmf el, the darkness. 
 
 — %itM, the farrow. 
 
 — grettet, or grettnriefel, 
 
 the ferret. 
 
 — jtapttel, the chapter. 
 
 — Sftartbel, the number 
 
 of fifteen. 
 
 — Wxtttlf the means. 
 
 £>a£ Sftogel, the pint. 
 
 — IDraM, the oracle. 
 
 — SRubel, the flock. 
 
 — ©cfyarmufeel, the skir- 
 
 mish. 
 
 — ©egel, the sail. 
 
 — ©iegel/ the seal. 
 
 — SSiefel, the weasel. 
 
 d) Substantives derived from numbers (See Method,, 
 Part II. Observation, page 3, and fractional numbers, 
 page 40). Ex. : — 
 
 £>a3 £)rittet, the third part. I &a$ SSicrtel, the fourth 
 
 part, &c. 
 
 e) All those terminating in fel (See Method, Part II. 
 page 7), as : — 
 
 £)a§ 2Cnfyangfel, appendage. I £)a3 Sfcdtfyfel, the enigma, 
 
 &c. 
 
 Second, Derivative words terminating in er (See Me- 
 thod, Part II. pages 3, 4. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 3>t 83ofyrer, the gimblet. 
 
 — jammer, the hammer. 
 
 — Scaler, the dollar. 
 
 £et £ttd)ter, the funnel, 
 &c. 
 
44 
 
 From this rule are excepted :- 
 
 a) The following feminine 
 
 £)te 2tber, the vein. 
 
 — 2£ujler, the oyster. 
 ■ — flatter, the blister. 
 
 — Dauer, duration. 
 
 — (§cf er, the acorn. 
 
 — (Sifter, the magpie. 
 
 — Safer, the fibre. 
 
 — geber, the pen. 
 
 — geter, the festival. 
 
 — goiter, the rack. 
 
 — ^atfter, the halter. 
 
 — belter, the press. 
 
 — Jticfyer, the chick-pea. 
 
 — liefer, the pine. 
 
 — JClafter 5 , the fathom, 
 
 the cord. 
 
 — Slammer, the clincher, 
 
 the parenthesis. 
 
 — flapper, the rattle. 
 
 — ituf ummer, the cu- 
 
 cumber. 
 
 b) The names of rivers having this termination, as : — 
 Die £ber, the Oder. | Die SBefer, the Weser, &c. 
 
 c) The following neuter words : — 
 
 Da£ TOer, the age. l £)a§ (Sitter, the udder. 
 
 — 33atter, the cage. — gertjler, the window. 
 
 substantives : — 
 
 £)te Salter, the lurking, the 
 lurking-place. 
 
 — £eber, the liver. 
 
 — Seter, the lyre. 
 
 — Setter, the ladder. 
 
 — barter, the torture. 
 
 — Matter, the wall. 
 
 — Matter, the viper. 
 
 — Summer, the number. 
 
 — Otter, the adder. 
 
 — Sftitjler, the elm. 
 
 — @d)eiter, the barn. 
 
 — <2>CT;lettber, the sling. 
 
 — @ coulter, the shoulder. 
 
 — ©tetter, the tax. 
 
 — trailer, the mourning. 
 
 — drummer, the wreck. 
 
 — SBimper, the eye-lash. 
 
 — Safety the cipher. 
 
 — Sifter, the guitar. 
 
 The word Rafter, is also neuter. 
 
45 
 
 £)a§ getter, the fire. 
 
 — gieber, the fever. 
 
 — guber, the cart-load. 
 
 — gutter, the lining. 
 
 — ©after, the grate. 
 
 — ©itter, the lattice, the 
 
 cross-bars. 
 
 — £ager, the couch, the 
 
 camp. 
 
 — Sajfer, the vice. 
 
 — £eber, the leather. 
 
 — £uber, the carrion. 
 
 — defter, the knife. 
 
 — SQfteber, the bodice. 
 
 £)a$ SJftujrer, the pattern. 
 
 — Dpfer, the sacrifice. 
 
 — ^Pflajler, the plaster. 
 
 — ?)otjier 6 , the bolster. 
 
 — SPufoer, the powder. 
 
 — 9£egij!er, the register. 
 
 — SRuber, the oar. 
 
 — ©teuer, the helm. 
 
 — Ufer, the shore. 
 
 — SBaffer, the water. 
 
 — SSetter, the weather. 
 
 — SBurtber, the wonder. 
 
 — Skitter, the room. 
 
 d) The words beginning with the syllable ge, and 
 having this termination, as : — 
 
 £>a£ ©elartber, the ba- 
 luster. 
 
 £)a§ ©ercitter, the storm, 
 &c. 
 
 e) The two names of metals : — 
 £)a3 Jlupfer, the copper. | £a3 ©fiber, the silver. 
 
 Third. Derivative substantives terminating in ett, 
 in g, ting, and the primitive words in alt (See Method, 
 Part II., pages 3, 4). 
 
 Examples. 
 
 £)er IBoben, the bottom, 
 the soil. 
 
 £)er Saben, the shop. 
 
 6 The word ^)olfter is also masculine. 
 
46 
 
 £)er ©cfyfttten, the sledge. 
 
 — feting, the herring. 
 
 — grueling, the spring. 
 
 — Sungltng, the youth. 
 
 — Shilling, the twin. 
 
 £)et (Stall, the stable. 
 
 — StnaUf the crack. 
 
 — gall, the case, the fall. 
 
 — @d)ali, the sound, 
 
 &c. &c. 
 
 Exceptions to this last rule are 
 
 a) The following words : — 
 2>a§ 2Clmofen, alms. 
 
 — 35ecfen, the basin. 
 
 — guEen, the colt. 
 
 — ©mriffen, the con- 
 
 science. 
 
 — ©ebrecfyen, the infir- 
 
 mity. 
 
 b) Infinitives taken substantively, as : — 
 
 £)et SBapen, the coat of 
 arms. 
 
 — Siifytn, the sign. 
 
 — (Sifen, the iron. 
 
 — Safen, the sheet. 
 - — jtiffen, the cushion. 
 
 £>a§ gaj?en, the fasting. 
 — ^)6ren, the hearing, 
 &c. 
 
 £)a§ <Sd)retben, the act of 
 writing. 
 — ©tefylen, the act of 
 stealing. 
 
 c) The following word terminating in i ng : — 
 
 £)a3 SDteffmg, the brass. 
 
 d) The following word terminating in all I — 
 
 £)a3 ^etaU, the metal. 
 
 II. Feminine are : — 
 
 First. All substantives terminating in ei, fyiit f hit 
 fcfyaft, inn, at!) (See Method, Part II., pages 4, 5, 6). 
 
47 
 
 Examples, 
 
 Dte $mberei, childishness. 
 
 — Sdnbelei, toyishness. 
 
 — gretfyeit, liberty. 
 
 — (Etnigf eit, union, con- 
 
 cord. 
 
 — guflbarf eit, the rejoic- 
 
 ing. 
 
 SDie gteunbfcfyaft, friend- 
 ship. 
 
 — greunbinn, the female 
 
 friend. 
 
 — itotugtnn, the queen. 
 
 — Qzimafy, home. 
 
 — ^eiratl), the marriage. 
 
 The following words are exceptions to this rule : — 
 
 £>a§ $etfd)aft, the seal. I ^)er fBorrat^ the provision. 
 
 Der Slaty, the advice. 
 
 Second. Nouns derived from verbs and terminating 
 in ung (See Method, Part II., page 6, and Obs. page 7). 
 
 Examples. 
 Die £>offnimg, hope. | Die ^cfyttmg, esteem, &c. 
 
 Third. Nouns formed from adjectives and terminating 
 in e (See Method, Part II., page 3). 
 
 Examples. 
 
 Die ©rof e, grandeur. 
 — ©ute, bounty. 
 
 Die %kbt, love. 
 — SDftlbe, mildness, &c. 
 
 Obs. From this rule must be excepted the adjectives 
 used substantively, expressing abstract ideas, and which 
 are neuter, as we have seen, page 41. 
 
48 
 
 Examples. 
 
 £)a§ ©ro£e, what is great. 
 — ©ute, what is good. 
 
 £>a§ ©d)6ne, what is beau- 
 tiful, &c. 
 
 Fourth. All other words terminating in e« 
 Examples. 
 
 £)k ©abc, the gift. 
 — (Snte, the duck. 
 
 £)te Quelle, the source. 
 — &aubt, the pigeon, 
 &c. 
 
 Exceptions to this rule are : — 
 a) The names of nations terminating in e* 
 Examples. 
 
 £)er £)dne, the Dane. 
 — £)eutfcfye, the German. 
 
 £)er gran^ofe, the French- 
 man. 
 — ©acfyfe, the Saxon, &c. 
 
 A) All the masculine substantives ending in e which 
 are mentioned in Exception II. of the declension of 
 masculine nouns, such as : — 
 
 £)er 2Cffe, the ape. 
 — 25arbe, the bard. 
 
 £)er S3ote, the messenger. 
 — 35ube, the lad, &c. 
 
 c) Nouns beginning with the syllable ge, and which 
 have this ending, such as : — 
 
 £>a§ ©emdtbe, the picture. 
 
 d) The following words, 
 
 £)a$ (Snbe, the end. 
 — 2Cuge, the eye. 
 
 £)aS ©etx>ebe, the tissue, 
 &c. 
 
 £)a3 (grbe, the heritage. 
 
49 
 
 III. Neuter are : — 
 
 First. All the diminutive words in d) e n and I c i n (See 
 Method^ Part I., Rule 2., Lesson lv). 
 
 Examples. 
 
 £)a§ SDldbcfyen, the girl. £)a3 grdulein, the young 
 
 I lady, &c. 
 
 Second. All infinitives, and in general, all other words 
 which, being no substantives, are used as such. Ex. : — 
 
 £>a§ (Sffett, the act of eating. 
 
 — £tmfen, the act of 
 
 drinking. 
 
 — ©efyen, the going. 
 
 £)aS %Ux, the but. 
 
 — liebe 3d), the dear I. 
 
 — SRzin, the no. 
 
 — 3a, the yes, &c. 
 
 Third. Words ending in tfyum, nig, fa I, and fel (See 
 Method, Part II., p. 7). Ex. :— 
 
 £)a$ %lttxtf)\xm, antiquity. 
 
 — SStStfyttm, the bishop- 
 
 ric. 
 
 — £eiltgtfyum, the sanc- 
 
 tuary. 
 
 — 33tft>nifj, the effigy. 
 
 £>a§ #infc>emtf, the obsta- 
 cle. 
 
 — Swgmjj, the testi- 
 
 mony. 
 
 — <&$)\&\at f fate. 
 
 — 9£&tf)fei, the enigma, 
 
 Exceptions to this rule are : — 
 
 a) The following words in tfyum : — 
 
 £)er Srtt^um, the error. | 2)er £ftetcfytf)um, riches. 
 
 b) The following words ending in nig : — 
 
 Die SSebrdngnig, distress. | £)ie SSeftunmerntg, grief. 
 
50 
 
 2Me SSeforgntf*, apprehen- 
 sion. 
 
 — 33etrubmj$, affliction. 
 
 — SSewanfctnifj, the cir- 
 
 cumstance. 
 
 — (Smpfdngmfj , concep- 
 
 tion. 
 
 — (grienntmg, judgment, 
 
 knowledge. 
 
 £)ie (Srlaubnijs, permission. 
 
 — (Erfparntf?, the saving. 
 
 — gdufaij?, putrefaction. 
 
 — gmfternif , darkness. 
 
 — .Kenntttijj, knowledge. 
 
 — IBerbammmfj, damna- 
 
 tion. 
 
 — SBUbernifj, the wilder- 
 
 ness. 
 
 Of the Gender of Compound Substantives 7 . 
 
 The gender of compound substantives is determined 
 by the gender of the word, which in the composition re- 
 presents the principal idea, and which is generally the 
 last. This last word also undergoes always the various 
 inflections of the declension (See Obs. C. page 5). 
 
 Examples. 
 
 £)er £au£ratf), the house- 
 hold furniture. 
 £a3 Slattyau§, guildhall 
 (the senate house). 
 £)et Soautoattx, the father 
 of the family. 
 £)aS SSatcr()au§, the pater- 
 nal house. 
 
 £)et Jtird^of, the church- 
 yard. 
 
 £)ie ^offtrcfye, the court- 
 church. 
 
 £)er Sagbfyttttb, the hound. 
 
 £)te SBmbmufyle, the wind- 
 mill, &c. 
 
 See Meth. Part II. pp. 9, 10, 11. 
 
51 
 
 Exceptions to this rule are : — 
 a) Some compounds with mutt), such as: — 
 
 £>ie TLnmutt), gracefulness. 
 
 — 2Ctmutf), poverty. 
 
 — £)emutf), humility. 
 
 — ©rofjmutfy, generosity. 
 
 — Sangmutfy, forbear- 
 
 ance, patience. 
 
 b) Also the following :— 
 £)er 2Cbfd^eu r the horror. 
 £>te %nt\voxt f the answer. 
 £)a3 9ftad)erlof)tt, the pay 
 for making. 
 
 £)te (Sanftmutfy, mildness,, 
 meekness. 
 
 — (Scfyroermut!), melan- 
 
 choly. 
 
 — SBefymutf) 8 , sadness, 
 
 wofulness. 
 
 £)te SJleunauge, the lamprey. 
 £)a§ Sagelofyn, the daily 
 
 pay- 
 
 £)er SSerfyaft, the arrest. 
 
 Of the Gender of Foreign Substantives. 
 
 Foreign words retain in German the same gender 
 which they have in the languages from which they are 
 borrowed. Ex. : — 
 
 £)er danalf the canal. 
 £)a3 Capital, the capital. 
 
 £)te ©pntaic, the syntax, 
 &c. 
 
 The following words must, however, be excepted from 
 this rule : 
 
 3 It is worthy of remark, that nearly all the words compounded of SOluth 
 are feminine, when they express mild and agreeable qualities ; whereas 
 they are masculine, when they express bad qualities. We are, however, to 
 except the two words, ber (Sbelmutt)/ generosity, and ber @letd)mittfv 
 equanimity, imperturbation. 
 
 f2 
 
52 
 
 £)et max, the altar. 
 
 — .ftatfyebet, the pulpit. 
 
 — Mhxptx, the body. 
 
 — ?>tmft, the point, the 
 
 period. 
 
 — £empet, the temple. 
 £)te Jtanjel, the pulpit. 
 
 — 9toctffe, the narcissus. 
 
 — SSofabel, the word. 
 To these may be added some words derived from the 
 
 Latin, and terminating in at* They are neuter, as : — 
 
 £)a§ Hmofen, the alms. 
 
 — (Sfyor, the chorus. 
 
 — @cfyo, the echo. 
 
 — genjler, the window. 
 
 — gteber, the fever. 
 
 — Sabpritltf), the laby- 
 
 rinth. 
 
 — $Pufoer, the powder. 
 
 £)a§ Sriummrat, the trium- 
 virate. 
 
 £)a6 Sonfulat/ the consulate. 
 — ^Prtr^tpat, the pre-emi- 
 nence, the priority. 
 Obs. A, I have given all the words which, taken from 
 ancient or modern languages, have in time lost their 
 original form, though retaining the gender. It would 
 indeed be asking too much from the pupils to expect 
 that they should trace the analogy existing between 
 2Cd)fel and axilla, Seier and lyra, §z\&)ix\ and signum, &c. 
 But I have omitted those words in which the analogy 
 is too evident to escape the pupiFs notice, such as : 
 hammer, camera ; Eloper, claustrum ; IRegei, regula ; (ix? 
 empel, exemplum, &c. 
 
 Obs. B. Some homonymous substantives are some- 
 times of one gender and sometimes of another, according 
 to their signification. I have given a list of them, which 
 see page 32. 
 
53 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 On the Declension of Adjectives. 
 
 It is seen in the Method (Lesson xx.) } that the ad- 
 jective when declined assumes three different forms, 
 viz. — 
 
 First, Without an Article. 
 
 Second. Preceded by the Definite Article or 
 
 BY A WORD OF THE SAME TERMINATION. 
 
 Third. When it follows the Indefinite Arti- 
 cle or a Possessive Pronoun. 
 
 DIVISION I. 
 
 The Adjective without an Article preceding it. 
 Rule I. When there is no article before the adjective, 
 it takes the same terminations as the definite article, ex- 
 cept in the genitive case singular, masculine and neuter^ 
 in which it adds en instead of e£ 9 . 
 
 9 Except also in the nominative and accusative singular of the neuter 
 in which it changes a£ into eS. 
 
 f3 
 
54 
 
 I. A TABLE 
 
 Of the Declension of Adjectives without an Article, 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Masculine. 
 
 Nom. er 
 
 Feminine. 
 
 e 
 
 Neuter^ 
 
 e§ 
 
 For all genders. 
 
 e 
 
 Gen. en 
 
 er 
 
 en 
 
 er 
 
 Dat. em 
 
 er 
 
 em 
 
 en 
 
 Ace. en 
 
 e 
 
 e$ 
 
 e 
 
 Examples. 
 
 THE ADJECTIVE WITHOUT AN ARTICLE PRECEDING IT. 
 
 1. Masculine. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 N. guter SOSetn/ 
 
 G. guten SBetneS/ 
 
 D. gutem SKetne/ 
 
 A. guten SBein/ 
 
 N. gute ©peifc/ 
 
 G. guter ©petfe, 
 D. guter ©petfe/ 
 
 A. gute ©petfe, 
 
 good wine, 
 of good wine, 
 to good wine. 
 
 good wine. 
 
 gute SBetne, 
 guter SSetne, 
 guten 50Setnen/ 
 gute SBeine, 
 
 good wines, 
 of good wines, 
 to good wines. 
 
 good wines. 
 
 2» Feminine. 
 
 good meat 
 (food), 
 of good meat, 
 to good meat. 
 
 a;ood meat. 
 
 gute (Spetfen/ good meats. 
 
 guter (Spetfen/ 
 guten ©petfen/ 
 gute ©peifen/ 
 
 of good meats. 
 
 to good meats. 
 
 good meats. 
 
 N. gute§ ©elb/ 
 G. guten (5$etbe§/ of good money, 
 D. gutem ©elbe, to good money, 
 A. guteS (§5eXb/ good money. 
 
 3. Neuter. 
 
 money. \ gute ©elber> 
 
 good monies, 
 guter ©elber/ of good monies. 
 guten (Mbern, to good monies, 
 gute ©elber, good monies. 
 
 Obs. Any pupil will know how to choose similar ex- 
 amples of nouns in those I have given in the declension 
 of substantives (See pages 5, 17, 22), and of adjectives 
 in the Method or the dictionary. It is therefore useless 
 to mention any here. 
 
55 
 
 DIVISION II. 
 
 The Adjective preceded by the Definite Article. 
 
 Rule II. Preceded by the definite article, or by a 
 word of the same termination, the adjective adds en in 
 all cases, except in the nominative singular of all gen- 
 ders, and the accusative singular feminine and neuter, 
 in which it adds e. 
 
 II. A TABLE 
 
 Of the Declension of Adjectives preceded by the Definite 
 Article. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Masculine. 
 
 Nom. e 
 
 Gen. en 
 
 Dat. en 
 
 Ace. en 
 
 Neuter/ 1 
 
 e 
 
 en 
 en 
 e 
 
 Plural. 
 
 For all genders. 
 
 en 
 en 
 en 
 en 
 
 Feminine. 
 
 e 
 
 en 
 
 en 
 
 e 
 
 Examples. 
 
 THEADJECTIVE PRECEDED BY THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. 
 
 1. Masculine. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 N. ber gute (Sobn, the good bte guten ©obne, the good 
 
 sons, 
 ber guten @6hne/ of the good 
 
 sons. 
 ben guten ©ofynen/ to the good 
 
 sons. 
 
 A. ben guten (Softn, the good bte guten Sofyne, the good 
 
 son. sons. 
 
 2. Feminine. 
 
 N. Me gute ©chraeftet/ the i bte guten ©djtr-ejtern/ the good 
 
 good sister. | sisters. 
 
 G. ber guten (Sdjrcefter/ of the ber guten (Scfctr-eftern, of the good 
 good sister. I sisters. 
 
 G. beg guten ©otynetl/ of the good 
 
 son. 
 
 D. bem guten ©obne/ to the good 
 son. 
 
56 
 
 Singular. 
 
 D. ber guten (Sdjwejter/ to the 
 
 good sister. 
 
 A. bte gute <Sd)tt>ejter, the 
 
 good sister. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 ben guten ©chweftem, to the good 
 
 sisters. 
 
 bte guten (Sd)tt>eftern, the good 
 sisters. 
 
 3. Neuter. 
 
 N. ba$ gute ^tnb/ the good 
 
 child. 
 G. beg guten &tnbe§, of the good 
 
 child. 
 
 D. bem guten &tnbe, to the good 
 
 child. 
 A. ba§ gute ,Ktnb, the good 
 
 child. 
 
 bte guten $tnber, the good 
 
 children. 
 
 ber guten $tnber, of the good 
 
 children. 
 
 ben guten $tnbern/ to the good 
 
 children. 
 
 bte guten ^inbeo the good 
 
 children 10 . 
 
 THE ADJECTIVE PRECEDED BY A WORD OF THE SAME 
 TERMINATION AS THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. 
 
 1. Masculine. 
 
 N. btefer fcfyone 35ctum/ this btefe fd)6nen S3aume, these 
 
 fine tree. 
 
 G. btefeS fd)6nen 23aume§, of this 
 fine tree. 
 
 D. btefem fcbonen SBaume, to this 
 fine tree. 
 
 A. biefen fchonen 33aum, this 
 fine tree. 
 
 fine trees, 
 btefer fchonen SSaume, of these 
 fine trees. 
 
 btefen fd)6nen SSaumen, to these 
 fine trees. 
 
 btefe fd)6nen 23Sume/ these 
 fine trees. 
 
 2. Feminine. 
 
 N. btefe fcfrone SStume, this 
 
 fine flower. 
 
 G. btefer fd)6nen 33lume, of this 
 
 fine flower. 
 
 D. btefer fd)6nen 33lume, to this 
 fine flower. 
 
 A. btefe fd)6ne 33lume, this 
 fine flower. 
 
 btefe fd)6nen SSlumen, these 
 
 fine flowers, 
 btefer fcbonen 33lumen, of these 
 
 fine flowers, 
 btefen fd)6nen SSlumen/ to these 
 
 fine flowers, 
 btefe fd)5nen Slumen/ these 
 
 fine flowers. 
 
 See Observation, page 54. 
 
57 
 
 Singular. 
 
 N. btefeS fd)5ne gelb/ this 
 
 fine field. 
 G. biefeS fchonen gelbeg, of this 
 
 fine field. 
 
 D. btefem fd)5nen getbe, to this 
 
 fine field. 
 A. btefeg fchone gelt/ this 
 
 fine field. 
 
 3. Neuter. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 btefe fd)6nen ^elber, these 
 
 fine fields, 
 biefer fcb&nen ^elber ; of these 
 fine fields. 
 
 btcfcn fcftonen gelbcrit/ to these 
 
 fine fields, 
 biefe fchonen gelber, these 
 
 fine fields. 
 
 Obs. Decline with jener, jene, jene6, that, and welder, 
 roelcfye, meld)e§, which, other nouns and adjectives (See 
 also Obs. page 54). 
 
 DIVISION III. 
 
 Tfte Adjective folloiving the Indefinite Article. 
 Rule III. When the adjective follows the indefinite 
 article or a possessive or personal pronoun, it adds er 
 in the nominative masculine, e in the nominative and 
 accusative feminine, e§ in the nominative and accusative 
 neuter, and en in the other cases. 
 
 III. A TABLE 
 
 Of the Declension of Adjectives folloiving the Indefinite 
 Article or a Possessive Pronoun. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 /- — 
 
 Masculine. 
 
 Feminine. 
 
 Neuter. 
 
 
 Norn. 
 
 er 
 
 e 
 
 e$ 
 
 
 Gen. 
 
 en 
 
 en 
 
 en 1 
 
 
 Dat. 
 
 en 
 
 en 
 
 en 
 
 
 Ace. 
 
 en 
 
 e 
 
 e$ 1 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 For all genders. 
 
 following 
 
 a possessive 
 
 pronoun 1 . 
 
 1 Adjectives following in the plural the possessive pronoun have the 
 same declension as with the definite article. (See Meth. Part I. Lesson 
 xv.) 
 
58 
 
 Examples. 
 
 THE ADJECTIVE FOLLOWING THE INDEFINITE 
 ARTICLE. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 1. Masculine. 
 
 N. em (d)6ner SBaum/ a 
 
 fine tree. 
 
 G. emc§ fd)5nen SBctumeS/ of a 
 
 fine tree, 
 D. einem fdjSnen £5aume, to a 
 
 fine tree. 
 A. etnen fd)6nen SSaum/ a 
 
 fine tree. 
 
 2. Feminine. 
 
 N. erne fcfyone SSlume/ a 
 
 fine flower. 
 
 G. einer fcfyonen 23lume/ of a 
 
 fine flower. 
 
 D. etner fd)5nen SBfame/ to a 
 
 fine flower. 
 
 A. erne fd^one 33lume, a 
 
 fine flower. 
 
 3. Neuter. 
 
 N. em fcfyoneS gelt/ a fine field. 
 
 G. eineg fd)6nen gelbe§/ of a fine field. 
 D. etnem fcfyonen gelbe^ to a fine field. 
 A. em fd)6ne§ gelb/ a fine field. 
 
 THE ADJECTIVE FOLLOWING A POSSESSIVE PRONOUN, 
 
 1. Masculine. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 N. mem guter ©o$it/ my 
 
 good son. 
 G. meineS guten (Sofyneg/ of my 
 
 good son. 
 D. meinem guten <Sofyne/ to my 
 
 good son. 
 
 A. meinen guten ©ofyn/ my 
 
 good son. 
 
 2. Feminine 
 
 N. meine gute ©cfyttefter/ my 
 
 good sister. 
 
 G. memer guten <Sd)tt>e|ter/ of my 
 
 good sister. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 meine guten @5§ne/ my good 
 
 sons, 
 memer guten (Sofyne, of my good 
 sons. 
 
 memen guten ©ofynen/ to my good 
 
 sons. 
 
 meine guten (Sofyne, my good 
 
 sons. 
 
 meine guten <Sd)tt>ejtern, my 
 good sisters. 
 
 memer guten ©dfymefiertv of my 
 good sisters. 
 
59 
 
 Singular. 
 
 D. metner- guten ©djwcjter; to my 
 
 good sister. 
 
 A. meine gute ©chmefter/ my 
 
 good sister. 
 
 Plural 
 
 metnen guten ©cfymeflern/ to my 
 
 good sisters. 
 
 meine guten (Scfymeftern, my 
 good sisters. 
 
 3. Neuter. 
 
 N. mem guteS £mb/ my 
 
 good child. 
 
 G. meme§ guten .fttnbeg, of my 
 
 good child. 
 
 D. meinem guten .Kinbe, to my 
 
 good child. 
 
 A. mem guteS «&inb/ my 
 
 good child. 
 
 Obs. Decline in the same manner with other nouns 
 and adjectives: betn, thy; fettt, his; urtfer, our; euer, 
 your ; tf)r, her, their ; fcin, no. 
 
 meine guten ^inber/ my good 
 
 children. 
 metner guten $tnber, of my good 
 children. 
 
 metnen guten ^inbern/ to my good 
 
 children, 
 meine guten .ftinber, my good 
 children. 
 
 A RECAPITULATORY TABLE 
 
 Of the Declension of German Adjectives. 
 
 The adjective without an 
 article before a sub- 
 stantive. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 ea 
 
 en 
 em 
 
 e3 
 
 N.je , 
 
 G. I er For all 
 
 D. I en f genders. 
 
 AJe ] 
 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 & 
 
 £ 
 
 rN. 
 
 er 
 
 e 
 
 G. 
 
 en 
 
 er 
 
 6D' 
 
 Z 
 
 D. 
 
 em 
 
 er 
 
 
 
 
 
 X 
 
 A. 
 
 en 
 
 e 
 
 The adjective preceded 
 by the definite ar- 
 ticle. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 e 
 
 en 
 en 
 en 
 
 en 
 en 
 
 en 
 
 Cil 
 
 Fem. 
 
 e 
 en 
 
 en 
 
 e 
 
 Neut. 
 
 e 
 
 en 
 
 en 
 
 e 
 
 For all 
 genders. 
 
 The adjective preceded 
 by the indefinite 
 article. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 er 
 en 
 en 
 en 
 
 Neut. 
 
 en 
 en 
 
 e§ 
 
60 
 
 DECLENSION 
 
 Of Comparative and Superlative Adjectives. 
 
 Comparative and superlative adjectives are declined 
 like the positive (See Meth. Part I. Obs. A., Lesson 
 xli). Ex.:— 
 
 THE ADJECTIVE IN THE COMPARATIVE FOLLOWING A 
 POSSESSIVE PRONOUN. 
 
 1. Masculine. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 N. fein fritfyerer S3orfa£, his 
 
 earlier design. 
 
 G. fetne§fruf)erenS3orfa§e§,ofhis 
 
 earlier design. 
 
 D. fetnemfruf)eren33orfa£e,tohis 
 
 earlier design. 
 
 A. feinen frufyeren 23orfa§, his 
 earlier design. 
 
 N. feine frufyere SSttte/ 
 
 earlier request. 
 
 G. feiner frufyeren SBitu, of his 
 
 earlier request. 
 D. feiner fruheren )8itU, to his 
 
 earlier request. 
 A. feine frufyere SSitte/ his 
 
 earlier request. 
 
 Plural. 
 feine frufyeren SSorfd^C/ his 
 
 earlier designs, 
 feiner fruheren SSorfd^e/ of his 
 
 earlier designs, 
 feinen frufyeren SSorfS^en/ to his 
 
 earlier designs, 
 feine frufyeren SSorfd^e/ his 
 
 earlier designs. 
 
 2. Feminine. 
 
 his feine frufceren 33itten, his ear- 
 
 lier requests. 
 
 feiner frutjerenSSitten/ofhis ear- 
 lier requests. 
 
 feinen frufoeren bitten/ to his ear- 
 lier requests. 
 
 feine frufyeren SSttten/ his ear- 
 lier requests. 
 
 3. Neuter. 
 
 N« fein frufyereS S3erfprcd)en/ his 
 earlier promise. 
 
 G. feineS frufyeren 23erfpred)enS, 
 
 of his earlier promise. 
 
 D. feinem frufyeren S3erfpred)en, 
 
 to his earlier promise. 
 
 A. fein frutyereS £3erfpred)en, his 
 earlier promise. 
 
 feine frufyeren SSerfpredjen/ his 
 
 earlier promises, 
 feiner fritfyeren SSerfyrechen/ of his 
 
 earlier promises, 
 feinen frttheren SSerfprechen/ to his 
 
 earlier promises, 
 feine frufyeren SSerfpred)en/ his 
 
 earlier promises. 
 
61 
 
 THE ADJECTIVE IN THE SUPERLATIVE PRECEDED BY 
 A POSSESSIVE PRONOUN. 
 
 1. Masculine. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 N. 3$r fd)6nfter ©arteti/ your 
 
 finest garden. 
 
 G. Styreg jchonjlen ©artenS, of 
 
 your finest garden. 
 
 D. Styrem fd)6n|ten Qdaxttn, to 
 
 your finest garden. 
 
 A. Sfyun fchonjlen ©arteti/ your 
 
 finest garden. 
 
 3f)re fd)onj!en ©drten, your 
 
 finest gardens. 
 Sfyrer fd)6nj!en ©drtert/ of your 
 
 finest gardens. 
 
 Sfyren fd)6njlen ©drtert/ to your 
 finest gardens. 
 
 3fyte fd)5nften ©drten, your 
 
 finest gardens. 
 
 2. Feminine. 
 
 N. Styre fd)6nj!e SSlumc/ your 
 
 finest flower. 
 
 G. 3fyt:erfd)6nftenS3lume/ofyour 
 
 finest flower. 
 
 D. 3fyrerfd)6nftenS3tume/toyour 
 
 finest flower. 
 
 A. 3&re fd)6nfte SBtume, your 
 
 finest flower. 
 
 Sfyre fd)6njlen SBlumen, your 
 finest flowers. 
 
 Sfyver fdjonften SBlumert/ of your 
 finest flowers. 
 
 3§wn fd)6nften SBlumen, to your 
 
 finest flowers. 
 Sfyte fd)6njten SBlumen/ your 
 finest flowers. 
 
 3. Neuter. 
 
 N. 3ftr fd)6nfte§ £aug, your 
 
 finest house. 
 
 G. 3$«$fd)6njien4?aufeg/ofyour 
 
 finest house. 
 
 D. 3^remfd)6njlen^aufe/toyour 
 
 finest house. 
 
 A. 3tyr fd)6nfteS £au§/ your 
 
 finest house. 
 
 Sfove fd)6nften £dufer/ your 
 
 finest houses. 
 
 3§wr fchonjlen £dufer/ of your 
 
 finest houses. 
 
 Shren fchortjten £dufern, to your 
 
 finest houses. 
 Sfrre fcftonften #dufer, your 
 finest houses 2 . 
 
 THE ADJECTIVE TAKEN SUBSTANTIVELY. 
 
 When taken substantively the adjective is declined in 
 the same manner (Meth. Part I., Lesson xx). Ex. : — 
 
 See Obs. Page 54. 
 
62 
 
 1. Masculine. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 N. ter SSeife/ the wise man. tic SBeifeil/ the wise men 
 
 G. teg SSBetfenj of the wise man. 
 D. temSOSeifetl/to the wise man. 
 A. ten SOSetfenr the wise man. 
 
 ter SBetfert/ of the wise men. 
 ten SBetfen/ to the wise men. 
 tie SDSeifen/ the wise men. 
 
 2. Feminine. 
 
 N. tie @d)6ne, the fair one. 
 
 G. ter (Schonen/ of the fair one. 
 
 D. ter ©d)6nen, to the fair one. 
 
 A. tie <£d)6ne, the fair one. 
 
 tie (S'djone/ the fair ones, 
 
 ter @d)5nen/ of the fair ones, 
 
 ten @d)6nen/ to the fair ones, 
 
 tie ©Ci)6nen/ the fair ones. 
 
 3. Neuter. 
 Obs. In the neuter gender adjectives used substan- 
 tively have no plural. 
 
 N. tag ©Ute> the good (what is good in itself). 
 
 G. teg ©Uten/ of the good. 
 
 D. tern ©uten/ to the good. 
 
 A. tag ©Ute/ the good. 
 
 In the same manner may be declined : 
 
 Der 33ef annte,the acquaint- 
 ance. 
 
 — £)eutfd)e, the German. 
 
 — gremfoe, the stranger. 
 
 — ©elefyrte, the learned 
 
 man. 
 And for the neuter : 
 £a§ (Sble, the noble (what 
 is noble). 
 
 — (Srfyabene, the sublime. 
 
 3d) $abz oft gefd)offen in tag ©cfyrcar&e, 
 Unt mand)en fd)6nen $>reig mir t)eimgebrad)t 
 SSom greubenfd)ie£en. 2Cber beute wttt id) 
 ©en SOletjlerfdjuf tfcun unt tag SB eftc mir 
 3m Qangen Umfretg teg ©cbirgg geroinnen. 
 
 @d)iUer'g SBilbetm Sell. 
 
 £)er ©elt ebte, the lover (be- 
 loved). 
 
 — ^etiige, the saint. 
 
 — Dveifenbe, the traveller. 
 
 — SSerroanbte, the rela- 
 tion, &c. &c. 
 
 £)a3 @^6ne, the beautiful. 
 — $ubfd)e, the pretty, 
 &c. 
 
Often have I hit the black mark, 
 And brought home many a fine prize, 
 From the shooting festival. But to-day I will 
 Do the master shot, and gain the lest thing 
 In the whole circuit of the mountains. 
 
 But with em, f etn, mem, &c. the nouns above must 
 be: — 
 
 din 33efannter,an acquaint- 
 ance. 
 
 — £)eutfcfyer, a German. 
 
 — grember, a stranger. 
 
 All these may be used in the same way for the fem- 
 inine, for which they are, when substantively used with 
 the indefinite article, the same as with the definite, 
 thus : — 
 
 (£m9fteifent>er, a traveller. 
 — SSetwanbter, a rela- 
 tion, &c. 
 
 £)te or etne ©ettebte* 
 
 ■ ^eiltge. 
 
 £ftetfenbe, 
 
 SSentxmbte^&a 
 
 £)te or erne SSefannte, the, 
 
 or a female acquaintance. 
 £)te or etne £)eutfcfye. 
 
 grembe* 
 
 _ ©elef)tte* 
 
 As for the neuter adjective substantively taken with 
 the indefinite article, the following phrases will show 
 how it is used : — 
 
 3d) ttmnfcfye Sfynett etn ©letd)e§, I wish you the same. 
 3$ mU em ©leic^e§ tfyun, I will do the same. 
 dineS ©otcfyen (genitive) fyattz id) mify rti d)t ^erfer;en, I 
 
 should not have expected such a thing. 
 3d) tterfefye mid) eineS SSefferen (genitive) $u 3()nen, I 
 
 am persuaded better things of you. 
 (Et l)at mid) etne$ IBefferen (genitive) bete^rt, he has set 
 
 me right. 
 £)a3 tjletn 2Cnbere$, that is different. 
 g2 
 
64 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 Of the Declension of Pronouns. 
 
 The pronouns, as we have seen (Method, Part II., 
 page 45), are divided into six classes, viz. : — 
 
 1st. The Personal Pronouns. 
 2nd. The Possessive. 
 3rd. The Demonstrative. 
 4th. The Relative. 
 5th. The Interrogative. 
 6th. The Indefinite. 
 
 DIVISION I. 
 
 Personal Pronouns, 
 
 As tKe table of these pronouns, in all their variations, 
 will easily be found in the Method (Part I., Lesson 
 xxx.), it will be sufficient to explain here to the learners 
 an easy way of learning them by heart, which has 
 always proved successful with my pupils. This will at 
 the same time oblige me to give their declension, but 
 under a different form. 
 
 Make a kind of gamut of each person, and when you 
 have learnt the first and second persons singular, repeat 
 them both together ; then proceed to the third person 
 singular masculine, and when this is known, repeat all 
 the three persons singular together, and so on, till you 
 know all the personal pronouns by heart. Thus : — 
 
65 
 
 
 
 N. 
 
 G. 
 
 D. 
 
 A. 
 
 1st person 
 
 singular, 
 
 id)/ 
 
 meiner/ 
 
 mitt 
 
 mid). 
 
 2nd „ 
 
 ,, 
 
 bu, 
 
 beiner/ 
 
 btr, 
 
 bid). 
 
 3rd „ 
 
 „ masculine, 
 
 er/ 
 
 fetner/ 
 
 fym f 
 
 ifyru 
 
 » „ 
 
 „ feminine, 
 
 fte, 
 
 iijrer/ 
 
 it)r/ 
 
 fte. 
 
 „ 
 
 „ neuter, 
 
 eg/ 
 
 fetner/ 
 
 t^tti/ 
 
 eg. 
 
 1st „ 
 
 plural, 
 
 ttrir/ 
 
 unfer/ 
 
 un§/ 
 
 ttng. 
 
 2nd „ 
 
 „ 
 
 tyr/ 
 
 euet/ 
 
 eud)/ 
 
 eud). 
 
 3rd „ 
 
 » 
 
 fte. 
 
 ii)rer/ 
 
 i|men/ 
 
 fte. 
 
 As soon as the learner is able to say them by heart 
 in this manner, it will be necessary for him to try to say 
 them with their English translation. Thus : — 
 
 1st person sing. 
 2nd „ „ 
 
 N. 
 i I; 
 
 G. 
 
 D. 
 
 masc. 
 
 fem. 
 
 neut. 
 
 meiner^ of me ; mil"/ to me ; mid)/ me. 
 
 bU/ thou; betner/ of thee ; bir/ to thee; bid)/ thee. 
 
 etv he ; feiner/ of him ; tyrtlt to him ; ifyn, him. 
 
 U)rer/ of her; 
 
 fte/ she ; 
 eg/ it ; 
 ttrir/ we ; 
 
 tf)V, to her ; fte/ her. 
 itjm/ to it ; eg/ it. 
 ung/ to us ; ung/ us. 
 eud)/ to you; eud)/ you. 
 ifanen/ to them ; fte/ them. 
 
 fetner/ of it ; 
 1st „ plur. ttrir/ we ; unfer/ of us ; 
 
 2nd „ „ tyx, you; euer/ofyou; 
 
 3rd „ „ fte/ they ; tfyrer/ of them 
 
 Obs. The reflective pronouns are quite the same for 
 all persons and cases, as the personal pronouns, except 
 the third, which is fid), self, for the singular as well as 
 for the plural, for the dative as well as for the accusa- 
 tive (See Meth. Pare I., Lesson lxxii., Part II., Note I, 
 page 45). Ex.: — 
 
 3rd person sing. masc. er begnfigt ftd) (Ace), he contents himself. 
 
 „ fem. ft'ebegnugt ftd) (Ace), she contents herself. 
 
 „ neut. egbegnugt ftd) (Ace), it contents itself, 
 
 plur. fte begnttgen ftd) (Ace), they content themselves. 
 
 „ masc. er fchmetdjelt ftd) (Dat.), he flatters himself. 
 
 „ fern, fte fd)m"Ctd)Cft ftd) (Dat.), she flatters herself, 
 
 plur. fte fd)metd)eln ftd) (Dat.), they flatter themselves, 
 
 g3 
 
66 
 
 DIVISION II. 
 Possessive Pronouns. 
 
 They are divided into two classes, viz. : — 
 
 a) Conjunctive or adjective possessive pronouns. 
 
 b) Substantive or absolute possessive pronouns (See 
 Meth. Part II., page 46). 
 
 A. Adjective possessive pronouns are declined in the 
 singular like the indefinite, and in the plural like the 
 definite article. They are the following : — 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 
 1st person singular, 
 
 metn, 
 
 meine, 
 
 meui/ 
 
 my. 
 
 2nd 
 
 beiii/ 
 
 beinc/ 
 
 bCltt/ 
 
 thy. 
 
 3rd „ „ masc. and neut. 
 
 fetn, 
 
 fetne/ 
 
 fetrt/ 
 
 his, its. 
 
 ,. „ „ feminine, 
 
 tyv, 
 
 ifyre, 
 
 tyVi 
 
 her. 
 
 1st „ plural, 
 
 unfer/ 
 
 unfere. 
 
 unfer/ 
 
 our. 
 
 2nd 
 
 iUilt 
 
 euere, 
 
 euer, 
 
 your. 
 
 3rd „ „ 
 
 ii>r, 
 
 tyw 
 
 tf)r, 
 
 their. 
 
 Obs. As is seen, this last person is exactly the same 
 as the third person feminine, ifyt, her. When used, out 
 of politeness, for the second person, it is written with a 
 large letter, thus : 3fyr, your. 
 
 The declension of the possessive pronouns being al- 
 ready known from that of the indefinite and definite 
 article, and from the declension of the adjectives with 
 which it has been given (See pages 55, 56, 58, 59), it is 
 useless to present here the declension of each person. 
 Their terminations are exactly the same, with the differ- 
 ences only of gender and case. For the sake of clear- 
 ness, however, I give the declensions of the two only 
 persons which might present some difficulty, on ac- 
 count of their being often abridged, namely : unfer, our ; 
 and euer, your. 
 
67 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Masc. Fem. 
 
 N. unfer/ tmfere/ 
 
 abridged, unfre/ 
 
 G. unfereg/ unferer/ 
 
 abridged, unfreg or unferg/ unfrer/ 
 
 D. unfereni/ unferer/ 
 
 abridged, unfrem or unferm/ unfrer, 
 
 A. unfcretv unfere/ 
 
 abridged, unfren/ or unfern/ unfre/ 
 
 Neut. 
 
 unfer/ our. 
 
 unfereg/ of our. 
 
 unfreg or unferg/ 
 unfereni/ to our. 
 
 unfrem or unferm/ 
 unfer/ our. 
 
 Plural. 
 For all genders. 
 
 N. unfere/ abridged unfre. 
 
 G. unferer/ „ unfrer. 
 
 D. unferen/ „ unfren or unfern. 
 
 A. unfere/ „ unfre. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 
 euere/ 
 
 euer/ 
 
 your. 
 
 eure/ 
 
 eur/ 
 
 
 euerer/ 
 
 euereg/ 
 
 of your 
 
 / eurer/ 
 
 eureg or euerg/ 
 
 
 euerer/ 
 
 euerem/ 
 
 to your. 
 
 ri f euretv 
 
 eurem or euerni/ 
 
 
 euere/ 
 
 euer/ 
 
 your. 
 
 f eure/ 
 
 eur/ 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 N. euer/ 
 
 abridged, eur/ 
 
 G. euereg/ 
 
 abridged, eureg or euerg, 
 
 D. euereni/ 
 
 abridged, eurem or euerni/ 
 
 A. eueren/ 
 
 abridged, euren or euern 
 
 Plural. 
 For all genders. 
 N. euere/ abridged, eure. 
 G. euerer/ „ eurer. 
 D. eueren/ „ euren or euern. 
 A. euere/ „ eure. 
 
 (See Method, Part I. } Obs. Lesson xxi.) 
 
 
68 
 
 B. Substantive or absolute possessive pronouns are : — 
 
 ber/ tie, ba$ meine 
 
 ber/ bie, ba$ beine 
 
 ber/ hie, ba$ feme 
 
 ber, bie, bat iftre 
 
 ber/ bie/ bag unfere or unferige/ ours. 
 
 ber/ bie f ba& eure or eurtge/ yours. 
 
 beiv bk, ba$ tyre or ibrige/ theirs. 
 
 or metmge/ mine, 
 or beinige/ thine, 
 or feinige/ his, its. 
 or ifyrige, hers. 
 
 These are declined exactly like the adjective preceded 
 by the definite article (See Rule II. page 55). Ex.: — 
 
 Singular. 
 
 N. ber meine or meinige/ mine. 
 G. be§ meinen or meinigen/ of 
 
 mine. 
 
 D. bem meinen or meinigen/ to 
 
 mine. 
 
 A. ben meinen or meinigen/ mine. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 bie meinen or meinigen/ mine. 
 ber meinen or meinigen/ of mine. 
 
 ben meinen or meinigen/ to mine. 
 
 bie meinen or meinigen/ mine. 
 
 But instead of: ber, bie, ba§ meine or rneimge; t>er, bie, 
 ba6 beine or beinige, &c, we may also say : — 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fern. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 
 meiner, 
 
 meine/ 
 
 meineg, 
 
 mine. 
 
 beiner, 
 
 beine/ 
 
 beineS/ 
 
 thine. 
 
 feiner/ 
 
 feme/ 
 
 feineg/ 
 
 his, its. 
 
 tfcrer/ 
 
 ifcre, 
 
 iftreg/ 
 
 hers. 
 
 unferer/ 
 
 unfere/ 
 
 unfereS/ 
 
 ours. 
 
 eurer/ 
 
 eure. 
 
 eureg/ 
 
 yours. 
 
 ihrer. 
 
 ifcre/ 
 
 tfyreS, 
 
 theirs. 
 
 Which, as is seen, receive the characteristic endings 
 of the definite article. (See Meth. Part I., Obs. Lesson 
 ix., and Obs. A., Lesson lxiii.) 
 8 
 
69 
 
 III. Demonstrative Pronouns. 
 They are of two kinds, viz. 
 
 a) Those which express a relation of place. 
 
 b) Those which designate before hand the person 
 or thing to which the relative pronoun which always 
 follows them relates, and may therefore be termed de- 
 terminative or predeterminating pronouns. 
 
 A. Demonstrative pronouns expressing a relation of 
 place are : — 
 
 Masc. Fern. Neut. 
 
 btefer/ btefe/ btefeg/ this. 
 
 jener/ jene, jene§/ that 
 
 They are declined exactly like the definite article, and 
 have the same value before the adjective (See pages 56, 
 57.) Ex.:— 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 
 For all genders. 
 
 N. btefer/ 
 
 btefe/ 
 
 btefeg/ 
 
 this. 
 
 btefe/ 
 
 these. 
 
 G. btefeS/ 
 
 btefer/ 
 
 btefeg/ 
 
 of this. 
 
 btefer/ 
 
 of these. 
 
 D. btefem, 
 
 btefer. 
 
 btefent/ 
 
 to this. 
 
 btefen/ 
 
 to these. 
 
 A. btefen/ 
 
 btefe/ 
 jene, 
 
 btefeS/ 
 jene§/ 
 
 this. 
 
 btefe/ 
 
 these. 
 
 N. jener/ 
 
 that. , 
 
 iene, 
 
 those. 
 
 G. jeneS/ 
 
 jener / 
 
 jeneg/ 
 
 of that. 
 
 jener/ 
 
 of those. 
 
 D. jenent/ 
 
 jener/ 
 
 ieneni/ 
 
 to that. 
 
 jenen/ 
 
 to those. 
 
 A. jenen/ 
 
 jene/ 
 
 jene§/ 
 
 that. 
 
 jene, 
 
 those. 
 
 Obs. The definite article may be used instead of these 
 pronouns ; but, as a pronoun it must be distinguished 
 from the article by a stress in the pronunciation. Its 
 declension in this case varies from the definite article in 
 the genitive singular and plural, and in the dative plural. 
 Thus :— 
 
70 
 
 Plural. 
 For all genders, 
 tie. 
 berer. 
 benen. 
 tie. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Masc. Fem. Neut. 
 
 N. ber, tie/ bag. 
 
 G. beffen (bef), beren (bee)/ beffen (bef ). 
 
 D. bem, ber/ bem. 
 
 A. ben, bie, ba§. 
 
 5. Determinative pronouns are: — 
 
 Singular. 
 Masc. Fem. Neut. 
 
 berjemge, btejemge, basientge, that or the one. 
 berfelbe/ btefelbe, baSfeibe, the same, 
 foldjer/ folche, foicfyeS/ such. 
 
 The two first (berjetttge, betfelbe) are declined exactly 
 like the definite article with an adjective (See Rule II., 
 page 55), with this only difference that they are spelt 
 in one word. Ex. : — ■ 
 
 Plural. 
 For all genders. 
 
 btejemgen, those, 
 btefetben, the same, 
 folcfte/ such. 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 For all genders. 
 
 N. 
 
 betjemge, the one, or that. 
 
 btejemgeri/ 
 
 those. 
 
 G. 
 
 begjemgen, of the one. 
 
 berjentgen, 
 
 of those. 
 
 D. 
 
 bemjemgert/ to the one. 
 
 benjemgen/ 
 
 to those. 
 
 A. 
 
 benjemgen/ the one. 
 
 btejentgen, 
 
 those. 
 
 N 
 
 berfelbe/ the same. 
 
 biefelbert/ 
 
 the same. 
 
 G. 
 
 begfelben/ of the same. 
 
 berfelben, 
 
 of the same. 
 
 D. 
 
 bemfelben, to the same. 
 
 benfetben/ 
 
 to the same. 
 
 A. 
 
 benfelbettf the same. 
 
 btefelben, 
 
 the same 
 
 Obs. £>etjemge, btejemge, baSjentcje, may also be sub- 
 stituted by the definite article, the declension of which 
 is then exactly the same as when it stands for biefer, 
 fotefe, t>iefe$ (See Obs. preceding page). 
 
 (Solder, folcfye, folcfyeS, such, is declined according to 
 the characteristic terminations of the definite article, 
 
71 
 
 but loses its inflections before the indefinite article, and 
 assumes the form of an adjective when preceded by it 
 or by fctn (See Meth. 5 Part I., Lesson lxxxiv). Ex. : — 
 
 ©old) em SSftertfd), such a man ; fold) cine Sfyat, such an 
 action ; fold) em SSerbrecfyert, such a crime. 
 
 din folcfyer SDfcann, such a man ; eine folcfye grau, such a 
 woman ; ein fold>e6 JUnb, such a child ; fold)e fOlcnfc^en, 
 such men, &c. 
 
 DIVISION IV. 
 Relative Pronouns. 
 
 Masc. Fem. Neut. 
 
 These are : rcelcfyer, welcfye, tt?eld)e§. 
 
 And its substitute : bet bte i)a$. 
 
 They are declined like the definite article of which 
 they have the value before the adjective ; their declen- 
 sion is the following : 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fern. 
 
 Neut. Masc. 
 
 Fern. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 N. 
 
 m\d)tv f 
 
 tt>e!d)C/ 
 
 meidjeg/ or, ter/ 
 
 bte. 
 
 baS/ which 
 
 G. 
 
 tt)eld)e§/ 
 
 weldjer/ 
 
 tt5eld)e§, or, beffcn/ 
 
 beren, 
 
 beffen/ of which. 
 
 D. 
 
 roeldjem/ 
 
 tt?eld)er/ 
 
 wetchent/ or, tern/ 
 
 ber, 
 
 bent/ to which 
 
 A. 
 
 roelcfyett/ 
 
 • wetcbe, 
 
 welched or, bert/ 
 
 PZwraZ. 
 
 For all genders. 
 
 bte. 
 
 bo6/ which 
 
 
 
 N. 
 
 wetche/ or, bte/ 
 
 which. 
 
 
 
 
 G. 
 
 roelcheiv or, bereri/ of which. 
 
 
 
 
 D. 
 
 welcheit/ or, benett/ to 
 
 which. 
 
 
 
 
 A. 
 
 roeldje/ or, bte, 
 
 which, 
 
 
 Ofo. A When the definite article stands for tt)eld)et, 
 its genitive case plural is not berer, but beren. SBelcfyer, is 
 
72 
 
 never used in the genitive^ as the genitives befjert, berert, 
 are preferred to the genitives welcfyeS, welcfyet, being more 
 easily distinguished from the nominative. 
 
 To show the learner how the determinative pronoun 
 berjentge is always followed by the relative pronoun xoiU 
 cfyer, we give them here their declensions together : 
 
 Singular. 
 Masculine. 
 
 or ber, that or the one which, 
 
 or befjert/ of that or the one which, 
 or bCttt/ to that or the one which, 
 or bet!/ that or the one which. 
 
 N. berjemge, welcher/ 
 
 G. beSienigeri/ rcelcfyeg/ 
 
 D. bemjemgen, welchem, 
 
 A. benjenigen/ wetchert/ 
 
 N. btejemge/ tt>eld)e/ 
 
 G. berjenigeri/ weidjer, 
 
 D. berjemgert/ welcfcer/ 
 
 A. biejemgc/ xotltyi 
 
 Feminine. 
 
 or btC/ that or the one which, 
 
 or bereri/ of that or the one which, 
 or ber/ to that or the one which, 
 or b&r that or the one which. 
 
 Neuter. 
 
 N. ba§}emge, roeld)e§, or ba§/ 
 
 G. beSjertigert/ welcfoeg/ or beffen/ 
 
 D. bemjemgen/ ruelcrjerrt/ or bem/ 
 
 A. baSjenige/ roelcfyeg, or bag/ 
 
 that or the one which, 
 of that or the one which, 
 to that or the one which. 
 
 that or the one which. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 For all genders. 
 
 N, biejemgert/ rcelcrje/ or tie/ those which. 
 
 G. ber iemgeti/ welcher/ or bereii/ of those which. 
 
 D. benjentgen/ wcldjeri/ or benen/ to those which. 
 
 A. biejentgeri/ weldje/ or tie/ those which. 
 
 Ofo. jB. We have seen before^ that instead of berjenige 
 voelcfyer, we may equally say : ber, welcfyer, &c. (See Obs. 
 page 70.) 
 
 Obs. C. SBer may sometimes be substituted for ber- 
 
73 
 
 jenige, rcelcfyer, and wa§ for t>a§jenige, tt>etd)e§ (ba§, was), 
 but it has no plural. Ex. : — 
 
 2Ber (for berjenige, welder) nicfyt tyoren will, mug fufylen, 
 he who will not listen must feel. 
 
 2Ba$ (for baSjentge, welcfyeS, ba§, n>a§) @ie mir fagen, 
 fcfyeint tternimfttg, what you tell me seems reasonable. 
 
 DIVISION V. 
 Interrogative Pronouns. 
 
 These are : 2Ber ? who ? tt)a6 ? what ? 
 
 2Geld)er, welcfye, rc>eld)e§ ? which ? 
 
 2Ba§ fur etn ? What (meaning what kind of)? 
 
 SBer is used for the masculine and feminine, and tt>a§ 
 for the neuter. They have no plural, and are declined 
 in the following manner : 
 
 Masc. & Fem. Neut. 
 
 N. tt>er ? who ? tt>ct§ ? what ? Is followed by the nominative. 
 
 G. tt?effen ? whose ? tt)ej]"en ? whose ? — — — the genitive. 
 D. rcem? to whom ? mem? to what? — — — the dative. 
 A. wen ? whom ? tt>a§ ? what ? — — — the accusative. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 Questions, 
 
 SBer ift ba ? who is there ? 
 
 SSaStftbaS? what is that? 
 SGSeffen v£>au§ ijt tag? whose 
 
 house is that ? 
 
 3d), I; bu, thou; er, he; ber 
 SSater/ the father ; tie Sautter, 
 the mother, &c. 
 
 (Sin 33ud> a book ; etne geber/ a 
 pen ; etn SDteffet*/ a knife. 
 
 SDtetneS SSruberS/ my brother's; 
 
 fetner. SDJuttet/ his mother's; 
 
 beg gencmnten $tnbeS/ the said 
 child's. 
 
74 
 
 Questions. 
 
 D. SSkmgebortber^ut? to whom 
 
 belongs the hat ? 
 
 2£en fyaffc bit gefefoen? whom 
 
 have you seen ? 
 
 12Ba§ fud)ft bu ? what do you 
 seek? 
 
 Answers. 
 
 SCRtr/ to me ; {font/ to him ; meinem 
 33t*ubetv to my brother; meiner 
 ©d)tt>efler, to my sister; bem 
 Mnbtf to the child. 
 
 3hll/ him ; fie, her ; ben greunb/ 
 the friend; tie ©djtttffter/ the 
 sister ; bag s JCRabd)en/ the girl. 
 
 SQtonen £ut, my hat; meine 
 geber/ my pen ; ba$ 23ud)/ the 
 book. 
 
 -2Betd)er, welcfye, ir>eld)ee> as an interrogative pronoun is 
 declined exactly like the relative pronoun welder, weldje, 
 welcfyeS* 
 
 9Ba§ fur eitt ? plur. wa§ fur ? what ? is used to desig- 
 nate the nature or kind of a thing. Ex. : — 
 
 2Ba§ fur einen Sifcfy fyaben 
 
 @ie? 
 3$ fyabe einen fyoljernen 
 
 SSaS fur eine geber fyaben 
 
 <3te? 
 (gtne (Stafylfeber. 
 28a$ fur em fJJleffer fyaben 
 
 (gin eiferne^* 
 
 2£a§ fur Stfcfye fyaben (Sic? 
 
 ^ol^erne. 
 
 SBaS fur em £eucfyter iff ba§? 
 
 G?§ ijl etn fitberner. 
 
 2£a3 fur etn Suffer if? t>a§ ? 
 
 Q& tjl etn ftlberneS. 
 
 What table have you ? 
 
 I have a wooden table. 
 
 What pen have you ? 
 
 A steel pen. 
 
 What knife have you ? 
 
 An iron one. = 
 
 What tables have you ? 
 
 Wooden ones. 
 
 What candlestick is that ? 
 
 It is a silver one. 
 
 What knife is that? 
 
 It is a silver one. 
 
75 
 
 DIVISION VI. 
 
 Indefinite Pronouns. 
 They express persons or things in an indefinite man- 
 ner. Some of them are declined, others not. The fol- 
 lowing are indeclinable : 
 
 Wlart, one, the people, any. 
 (See Meth. Parti. Les- 
 son L.) 
 (£§, it, so. (Lesson xlv.) 
 (SttDaS, something, any 
 thing. (Lessons vii. and 
 liii.) 
 
 yiiti)t$ f nothings not any 
 thing. (Lesson vii.) 
 
 (gmanbet, each other. (Les- 
 son Ixxxviii.) 
 
 (Selbff or felber, self, selves. 
 (Lesson xci.) 
 
 2ClIetU, alone. 
 
 The following are declined;, some like adjectives, others 
 like an article, and others again assume both the form 
 of an adjective and of an article. 
 
 din, eine, ein, a or an, one, is declined like an article 
 and like an adjective. Ex. : ber, bte, ba§ eine, the one ; 
 plur. bte etnen, the one (ones). 
 
 When a noun is understood em takes the character- 
 istic endings of the definite article. Ex. : — 
 
 Sfl ein grembet angel ommen? 
 (§& tft einer angelommen* 
 SBiet>tel £ute fyaben <3te ? 
 3<fy fyciht nur etnen* 
 SBtemel £tnber fyat 3&r 
 
 SSrnber ? 
 <£r l)at nnr eineS (or ctnS). 
 
 $ein, f eine, f ein, no, none, not a, or not any ; plur. f eine, 
 no, none, or not any, is declined like the indefinite arti- 
 
 3 See Lessons xx., xxv. andlxxx. Meth. Part I. 
 
 h2 
 
 Has a foreigner arrived? 
 
 One has arrived. 
 
 How many hats have you ? 
 
 I have but one. 
 
 How many children has 
 
 your brother? 
 He has but one 3 . 
 
76 
 
 cle etru When a substantive is understood, it has,, like 
 em, the characteristic terminations of the definite article. 
 Ex.:— 
 
 Sfi SBetn ba ? 
 Q?s tjl fetner t>a. 
 £>aben <&k *8rob ? 
 Set) fyak femes, 
 ^>at cr S5ud)er ? 
 dr fyat feme. 
 
 Is there any wine ? 
 
 There is none. 
 
 Have you any bread ? 
 
 I have none. 
 
 Has he any books ? 
 
 He has not any. 
 
 (See Lessons xix. and lxxx. Meth. Part I.) 
 
 
 2(11, all, every, is declined like the definite article. It 
 is never preceded or followed by an article, but may be 
 so by a pronoun. Ex.: — 
 
 N. 2Clter gute SSein, all the good wine. 
 
 G. 2CUeg guten 2Setne§/ of all the good wine. 
 D. 2Ctfem guten SKetne, to all the good wine. 
 A. 2Ctlen guten SBein, all the good wine. 
 
 Fern. Me QUte 23utter, all the good butter. 
 
 Neut. Me& gute SSafjer, all the good water. 
 Plur. Me gute Winter/ all the good children, &c. 
 
 Obs. A. When two words like all, which do not take 
 the definite article, such as, btefer, this ; jener, that ; &c, 
 are placed one after the other, they have each the cha- 
 racteristic endings of this article. Ex. : — 
 
 2Cller btefer SBetrt (not btefe), all this wine. 
 
 2Ule$ t>tefe$ ©elb (not btefe), all this money. 
 
 2(lle biefe itmfrer, all these children. 
 
 2£lle tuefe guten ^inber, all these good children. 
 
 B. In familiar style, when all is followed by a pronoun, 
 it often rejects its termination. Ex. : — 
 2CU fefn ©elb, all his money. 
 (See Lessons xxxiv. li. and lxxx. Meth. Part I.) 
 
77 
 
 briber, other, is declined like an adjective. Ex. : — 
 
 2Cnberer Jtdfe, anbere sfililty, 
 anbereS 83rob, anbere 
 9>ferbe* 
 
 £)er anbere, bte anberen. 
 (Sin anberer, eine anbere, 
 
 em anbereS, 
 $aben @ie anbere $)ferbe ? 
 3$ fyabt anbere, ic^) fyabe 
 
 !etne anbere. 
 Qat 3fyr SSruber ein anbere^ 
 
 Q£t fyat ein anbere^ 
 
 Other cheese, other milk, 
 other bread, other 
 horses. 
 
 The other, the others. 
 
 Another. 
 
 Have you other horses ? 
 I have others, I have no 
 
 others. 
 Has your brother another 
 
 house ? 
 He has another. 
 
 (See Lessons xxiii. and lxxx., Meth. Part I.) 
 
 SBetbe, both, is declined like an adjective. Ex. :- 
 
 $aben @te meine betben 
 
 £itte? 
 $aben ©ic metn 33ncr; ober 
 
 ba$ metneS greunbeS ? 
 3d) i)aU betbe. 
 
 Have you both my hats ? 
 
 Have you my book or nry 
 
 friend's ? 
 I have both. 
 
 Obs. When betbe represents two different things, and 
 does not relate to persons, the singular neuter beibe§ is 
 employed. Ex. : — 
 
 $aben @tc ben SSeutel ober 
 
 ba3@elb? 
 3$ fyabt betben 
 
 Have you the purse or 
 
 the money ? 
 I have both. 
 
 (See Lesson xxiv. Meth. Part I.) 
 
 (Eirttge or etltcbe, a few, some, sundry, expresses more 
 than a singular, in which number it is therefore seldom 
 used. It is declined according to the characteristic ter- 
 h3 
 
78 
 
 minations of the definite article, by which it cannot be 
 preceded or followed. Ex. : — 
 
 vgjaben ©te einige gebern ? Have you a few pens ? 
 
 3d) babt einige. 
 
 @:r bat einige gute SSucfyer. 
 
 I have a few. 
 
 He has some good books. 
 
 (See Lesson xxiii. Meth. Part I.) 
 
 3eber, jebe, jebe£, each, or each one, has no plural, and 
 is declined like all, according to the characteristic ter- 
 minations of the definite article. Preceded by the in- 
 definite article, it is declined like an adjective preceded 
 by this article. Ex. : — 
 
 Seber SDfcenfcfy fyat feine 
 
 gefyler. 
 din jebet fprtcfyt ba$on. 
 din jeber nad) feinem ©e^ 
 
 fcfomacf* 
 
 Every man has his de- 
 fects. 
 
 Every one speaks of it. 
 
 Each according to his 
 taste. 
 
 (See Lesson lxxii. Meth. Part I.) 
 
 SDfancfyer, mancfye, mand)e3, 
 some, is declined according 
 nations of the definite article 
 
 SDlancfyer gto^e £err. 
 9ftand)e§ bxaw 5D?abd)en. 
 9ftand)er gibt fid) fur retcr; 
 
 auS, ber e3 nid)t iji 
 SSftancfye grauen ubertreffen 
 
 bie banner an f8erjtant>* 
 
 plur. manege, many a one, 
 to the characteristic termi- 
 which it never takes. Ex. : — 
 
 Many a great lord. 
 Many a brave girl. 
 Many a one pretends to 
 
 be rich who is not so. 
 Some women surpass men 
 
 in wit. 
 
 Sftefyte or mefyrere, and tterfefyiebene, many, several, are 
 declined according to the characteristic terminations of 
 the definite article, but preceded by a word of the cha- 
 
79 
 
 racteristic terminations, or by em, mem, fein, &c, they 
 are declined like adjectives. Ex.: — 
 
 (Ex f)at mefyrere gute iUrtbev* 
 
 (Er tjt mtt tierfcfyiebenen 
 £)mgen befdjaftigt* 
 
 He has several good chil- 
 dren. 
 
 He is busy about several 
 things. 
 
 (See Lessons xxv and lxxx. Meth. Part I.) 
 
 Semanb, some one, or any one, and -Dtiemattb, no one, 
 not any one, are, of course, used only in the singular, 
 and declined in the following manner : — 
 
 N. 3emcmb, G. Semanbeg, D. Semanteme A. Semanben, some one or 
 
 somebody. 
 
 N. Sfttemanb/ G. SftiemanbeS/ D. 9tiemanbem/ A. Sfttemanben, nobody. 
 Examples. 
 
 Bennett @te Semanben in 
 
 btefet <&tcM ? 
 3d) fenne SRtemanben fytx. 
 
 Do you know any one in 
 
 this town? 
 I know no one here. 
 
 (Lesson xii.) 
 
 Scbermann, every one, every body, takes only an § in 
 the genitive, and remains invariable in all the other 
 cases, thus : N. Sebermatm, G. SebermatmS, D. 3eber- 
 matm, A. Sebermamu Ex.:— 
 3ebermann fpricfyt tton 3^ I Everybody talks of your 
 
 rem ncucn SBucfye, I new book. 
 
 Obs. I have to speak of met, much, and weritg, little, 
 though these words do not belong to this chapter. But 
 their frequent use in German, notwithstanding their 
 hitherto unsettled state with regard to declension, often 
 embarrasses foreigners, and makes it incumbent upon 
 me to explain them. They are by some grammarians 
 
80 
 
 considered as adjectives,, by others as indefinite nume- 
 rals ; but they may be used as either, and even stand 
 as adverbs of quantity. They are declined like adjec- 
 tives when preceded by an article, pronoun, or preposi- 
 tion, or when they stand alone and are used substan- 
 tively; otherwise they are indeclinable. 
 Examples. 
 
 The great quantity of mo- 
 ney which he has. 
 
 £)a§ triele ©elfc>, ba$ er fat. 
 T>a§ wedge ©elb* 
 
 £)a$ SSenige, wa$ tcfy fyabt. 
 ©em meleS ©elb. 
 
 @eme melert ©efcfydfte. 
 fSZit SStclem fydlt man ^>au§, 
 
 mit SBemgem fommt man 
 
 aucf) au§ (a proverb), 
 ^aben @te mel ©elb ? 
 $at er met SBeirt ? 
 3d? ^abc nur wentg SDftld)* 
 (E*r f)at nur wenig gleifd>» 
 
 Ofo. 5. SGBenig, with the indefinite article before it, is 
 not declined, nor is the article. Examples : — 
 
 The small 
 
 of 
 
 quantity 
 money. 
 
 The little I ampossessedof. 
 
 His great quantity of mo- 
 ney. 
 
 His numerous affairs. 
 
 You may keep house with 
 much as well as with 
 little. 
 
 Have you much money ? 
 
 Has he much wine ? 
 
 I have but little milk. 
 
 He has but little meat. 
 
 din wentg -2Betru 
 din roemg Staffer* 
 3d) bitU ©tc urn em wenig 
 (Bat*. 
 
 (See Lesson xxii. Meth. Part I.) 
 
 A little wine. 
 
 A little water. 
 
 I ask you for a little salt. 
 
INDEX. 
 
 a Adjectives, of the declension of, 
 53. A table and examples of 
 adjectives without an article, 
 54 ; of adjectives preceded by 
 the definite article, 55, 56 ; of 
 adjectives following the inde- 
 finite article or a possessive 
 pronoun, Note I, 57, 58. A 
 recapitulatory table of the de- 
 clension of adjectives, 59. De- 
 clension of comparative and 
 superlative adjectives, 60. The 
 adjective in the comparative 
 following a possessive pronoun, 
 ibid.; in the superlative pre- 
 ceded by a possessive pronoun, 
 61. The adjective taken sub- 
 stantively, 61, et seqq. 
 
 W&X, ClUe, alleg (an indefinite 
 
 pronoun), all, every, Obs. A, B, 
 
 76. 
 
 2Cnber, (an indefinite pronoun), 
 
 other, 77- 
 
 SScibCf (an indefinite pronoun), 
 
 both, Obs.1T. 
 
 Compound Words, in, the last of 
 the component words only is 
 softened, Gbs. C, 5. 
 
 Dative, the, case singular of 
 masculine and neuter nouns, 
 takes e when the genitive takes 
 eg, Obs. A, 4. 
 
 Declension of Substantives, 
 Note 1. Preliminary Obs. A, 
 B, C, 1. A table of the de- 
 clension of substantives, 2. De- 
 clension of masculine substan- 
 tives, Rule I., Note 2, ibid et 
 seqq. Masculine substantives, 
 the declension of which has 
 hitherto been doubtful, and is 
 not so any more, Obs. 12. 
 Declension of feminine sub- 
 stantives, Rule II., 15 ; of neuter 
 substantives, Rule III., Note 6, 
 20; of words derived from 
 foreign languages, 27, et seqq. ; 
 of substantives of the same con- 
 sonance which vary in their 
 gender and plural according to 
 their different signification, Obs. 
 
 A, 32 ; of proper nouns, 35, 
 36 ; of adjectives, 58, et seqq.; 
 of pronouns, 64, etseqq.; of the 
 definite article when it is sub- 
 stituted for the demonstrative 
 and determinative pronouns, 70; 
 when it stands for the relative 
 pronouns, Obs. A, 71. Declen- 
 sion of the determinative and 
 relative pronouns together, Obs. 
 
 B, C, 72 ; of the interrogative 
 pronouns, 73, 74; of the in- 
 definite pronouns, 75, 76, et 
 
82 
 
 Serjemge, Mejemge, baSjemge (a 
 
 determinative pronoun), that or 
 the one, 70. 
 
 ©erfelbe, Mefetbe, baSfelbe (a de- 
 terminative pronoun), the same, 
 
 70. 
 
 Diphthong, in the, cut, a is sof- 
 tened, Obs. C, 5. In the diph- 
 thong eu, the letter U is not 
 softened, ibid. 
 
 ©in, cine/ em (an indefinite pro- 
 noun), a or an, one, 75. 
 
 (SmtCje or etttdje (an indefinite 
 pronoun), a few, some, sundry, 
 77. 
 
 Exceptions. — Masculine sub- 
 stantives which do not soften 
 the radical vowels in the plural, 
 Obs. D, 5. 8, et seqq.; which 
 take en or n in the genitive 
 singular, and retain this termi- 
 nation in all the cases of the 
 plural without softening the ra- 
 dical vowels: 1. those ending 
 in ?/* Notes 4, 5, p. 9; 2. those 
 derived from foreign languages, 
 10 ; 3. those which cannot be 
 classed under any rule, Notes 
 6, 7, 8, 9, pp. 11, 12. Mas- 
 culine substantives which in 
 the singular follow the general 
 rule, and form their plural in 
 en, 13, Notes 1, 2, 3, p. 14; 
 in e Xf ibid., 15 ; which change 
 in the plural the termination 
 ma nn into leute, ibid. Fem- 
 inine substantives which soften 
 in the plural the radical vowels 
 without adding anything, 18 ; 
 which add in the plural Z f and 
 soften the radical vowels, ibid., 
 19 ; which add e in the plural 
 without softening the radical 
 vowels, 19. Feminine mono- 
 syllables which, though con- 
 taining one of the vowels d/ U/ 
 are nevertheless declined like 
 other feminine substantives, 
 Obs., 19, 20. Neuter substan- 
 
 tives which take in the plural 
 Z, without softening the radical 
 vowels: 1. those derived from 
 verbs, and beginning with the 
 syllable ge, Note 10, 24; 2. 
 those ending in $/ 25 ; 3. those 
 derived from foreign languages 
 and ending in ent/ ibid., Obs. 
 26 ; 4. those which cannot be 
 classed under any rule, ibid., 
 Obs. A, 27. Neuter nouns add- 
 ing e n in the plural, Obs. B, C, 
 ibid. Names of men ending 
 in X, Obs. A, 35; in fd)/ 6/ % 
 f / £, §/ Obs. B, 36 ; of men and 
 women ending in d)en/ Obs. C, 
 ibid. 
 
 Gender, of Substantives, of 
 the, 37. The gender of sub- 
 stantives is known, — 1. by their 
 meaning, ibid, et seqq.; 2. by 
 their termination, ibid., 41, et 
 seqq. Of the gender of com- 
 pound substantives, 50, Note 
 8, 51; of foreign substantives, 
 51, Obs. A, B, 52. 
 
 Genitive, the, singular of mas- 
 culine and neuter nouns some- 
 times terminates in 6/ and 
 sometimes in e£, Obs. A, 4. 
 
 Introduction, containing in- 
 structions on the use of the 
 Introductory Book, and of the 
 Method, vii. et seqq. 
 
 Sebet/ jebe, jebeg, (an indefinite 
 pronoun), each, or each one, 
 78. 
 
 Sebermann/ (an indefinite pro- 
 noun), every one, every body, 
 79. 
 
 3emanb (an indefinite pronoun), 
 some one or any one, 79. 
 
 &Z\tt f feme/ letn (an indefinite 
 pronoun), no, none, not a, or 
 not any, 75, 76. 
 
 SCftancber/ mandje, mand)eS (an 
 
 indefinite pronoun), many a 
 one, some, 78. 
 
83 
 
 SOM)re or mefyrere (an indefinite 
 pronoun), many, several, 78, 79. 
 
 Names of persons, 35. 
 
 Sttemanb (an indefinite pronoun), 
 no one, or not any one, 79. 
 
 Nouns. — See Substantives. See 
 Declension. 
 
 Plates showing the learner how 
 he is to write his exercises and 
 his declensions, 5, 16, 22. 
 
 Pronouns, of the declension of, 
 64. Personal pronouns, ibid. 
 An easy way of learning them 
 by beart, ibid., 65. The re- 
 flective pronouns, Obs. 65. The 
 possessive pronouns, 66 ; they 
 are divided into two classes: 
 a) conjunctive or adjective, 
 ibid., 67 ; b) substantive or ab- 
 solute, 68. Demonstrative pro- 
 nouns, 69 ; they are of two 
 kinds: a) expressing a relation 
 of place, ibid.; b) predeter- 
 minating, 70. These pronouns 
 may be substituted by the de- 
 finite article, ibid. Relative 
 pronouns, 71 ; they may also 
 be substituted by the definite 
 article, but then its genitive 
 plural is different, Obs. A, ibid., 
 Obs. B, C, 72. Interrogative 
 pronouns, 73, 74. Indefinite 
 pronouns, 75 ; some of them 
 are indeclinable, ibid; others 
 are declined, ibid., 76, el seqq. 
 
 <Sold)er/ folche/ fotdjeg/ such, 70, 
 71. 
 
 Substantives, masculine, chang- 
 ing the radical vowel a into 
 
 d in the plural, 2 ; into 0/ 
 3 ; U into ft/ ibid; ending in 
 fz which in the genitive and 
 dative singular and all the 
 cases plural is changed into ff/ 
 ibid., Obs. B, 4; ending in el/ 
 3 ; in en/ 4 ; in CV/ ibid. 
 Feminine substantives ending 
 in e 5 in et, in cr 5 not having 
 either of the terminations Z t el/ 
 et*/ 16; derived from foreign 
 languages, ibid. Neuter sub- 
 stantives changing in the plural 
 the radical vowel a into &/ 
 into 6/ U into fl/ 21 : ending in 
 el/ ei1/ et*/ they do not add any- 
 thing in the plural, and do not 
 soften the radical vowels, 20, 
 22 ; ending in g/ which, in the 
 genitive and dative singular 
 and all the cases plural, is 
 changed into f/ 21 ; ending in 
 fz which is changed into ff/ in 
 the genitive and dative singular 
 and all the cases plural, ibid. 
 Of the gender of substantives, 
 37, et seqq. 
 
 SSerfd)iebene (an indefinite pro- 
 noun), many, several, 78, 79. 
 SStel/ much, Obs. 79. 
 
 Vowels, in double, one is soft- 
 ened in the plural, and the 
 other is suppressed, Obs. C, 5. 
 
 SBaS? what? 73. 
 
 £Ba§ fur em? what (meaning, 
 what kind of) ? 73, 74. 
 
 SBema,/ little Obs. 79, 80. (Sin n>e= 
 nig/ a little, Obs. B, 80. 
 
 SBer? who? 73. 
 
LONDON : 
 
 cxilbert and hivington, printers 
 st. John's square. 
 
TREATISE 
 
 ON THE 
 
 PRONUNCIATION OF THE GERMAN 
 LANGUAGE, 
 
 ^fcapUtf for tl)t u$c oi JSegtmurS, 
 
 STUDENTS WHO REQUIRE ONLY TO RECTIFY THEIR 
 PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 BY GUSTAV.US NAGEL, 
 
 PROFESSOR OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 
 
 Author of The German Reader and Flowers of the German Classics ; Prince 
 German, Indian, and English Tales, 
 etc. etc. etc. 
 
 LONDON: 
 D, NUTT, 158, FLEET STREET. 
 
 1841. 
 
NUMEROUS ADMIRERS 
 
 OF 
 
 THE GERMAN LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE 
 IN ENGLAND, 
 
 THIS LITTLE VOLUME 
 
 IS RESPECTFULLY DEDICATED. 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 Diversity of dialect is a peculiar characteristic of 
 the German language. Its varieties have been divided 
 into two great classes — the one termed High German 
 ($od) £)eutfd)), the other Low German (iRteber £)eutfd)), 
 each existing under a multitude of modifications, the 
 result of local and other causes. Luther, by adopting the 
 German of Saxony in the composition of those works 
 which rapidly acquired an almost universal circulation, 
 gave to the Saxon dialect that preeminence which it 
 has ever since retained. Thus, this dialect, which was 
 originally restricted to a very small portion of Germany, 
 has now become the sole organ of intercourse both 
 political and social, as well as the instrument of intellec- 
 tual exertion throughout this large and populous country. 
 Some lingering remains of the modifications we have 
 above alluded to, still retain a strong hold upon the 
 uneducated classes ; but the progress of refined educa- 
 tion is gradually expelling them from the diction of the 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 superior classes. Foreigners who have occasion to 
 travel through the country require an accurate guide 
 to enable them to distinguish between an impure 
 and a correct pronunciation. To supply this desi- 
 deratum is the object of the present publication, which, 
 by fixing the pronunciation of the language upon 
 general and invariable principles, furnishes the English 
 student with a permanent authority in all cases of doubt. 
 
 It is, therefore, with the greatest confidence that 
 I offer this little work to students of the German 
 language and its literature, feeling conscious, as I do, 
 that it is thoroughly adapted to the present state of the 
 German language, which, from the patient labours of 
 the great men who have adorned its philological litera- 
 ture during the last and the present centuries, has at 
 length attained perfection. 
 
 The rules and principles laid down in this treatise 
 have been framed in strict conformity with the views of 
 the writers alluded to, and simplicity and precision, 
 combined with the requisite explanations for meeting 
 every contingency, is what I have carefully sought. I 
 have constructed exercises on the pronunciation of 
 
 
the elementary sounds, for the practical application of the 
 rules ; and the accentuation is preceded by a full deve- 
 lopment of the principles of the formation of words, 
 thus affording the student an easy and clear insight 
 into the structure of the language, which he otherwise 
 could only obtain from a protracted course of study. 
 
 The general directions preceding the Exercises at 
 the close of the work, are intended to serve as a per- 
 manent guide, and they, therefore, combine in one 
 brief view the most important practical rules dispersed 
 throughout the Treatise. A frequent reference to this 
 abstract, preceded by a careful study of the preliminary 
 matter, will not fail to ensure the speedy and certain 
 attainment of a correct and elegant pronunciation of 
 the language. 
 
 GUSTAVUS NAGEL. 
 
 1, Marylebone Street, 
 RegenVs Quadrant. 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 PAGE. 
 
 The Alphabet, or the Elementary Sounds, as represented 
 
 by the Letters in Writing 1 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 Pronunciation of the Elementary Sounds 3 
 
 I. Pronunciation of the Vowels — 
 
 II. Pronunciation of the Diphthongs 9 
 
 III. Pronunciation of the Consonants 10 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 Articulation of the Elementary Sounds when forming the 
 Constituent Parts of the Syllables and Words ,.. 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 Spelling 23 
 
 Exercises on the Pronunciation of the Elemfntary Sounds 27 
 
 I. Exercises on the long and sharp sound of the Vowels — 
 
 II. Exercises on the Pronunciation of the Diphthongs 30 
 
 III. Exercises on those Vowels and Diphthongs the Sound of 
 
 which is carefully to be distinguished in the Pronuncia- 
 tion 31 
 
 IV. Exercises on the Pronunciation of the Consonants 34 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 The Formation of Words 47 
 
 I. Root-words — 
 
 II. Derivatives — 
 
 III. Compounds 52 
 
 IV. The Grammatical Inflexions 55 
 
 V. Examples of the Position of the Root in Words increased by 
 
 Syllables of Derivation and Grammatical Inflexion 57 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 The Accentuation 59 
 
 I. The Accentuation of the Syllables 60 
 
 1. The Accentuation of the Syllables in Simple (Uncom- 
 
 pounded) Words 61 
 
 2. The Accentuation of Syllables in Compound Words 64 
 
 3. The Accentuation of the Syllables in Foreign Words. ... 72 
 II. The Accentuation of Words 73 
 
 III. The Oratorical Accent 75 
 
 Exercises on the Accentuation 77 
 
 General Directions for Reading 79 
 
 Exercises in Reading 85 
 
 1. £>ie ©pracfte be§ ^ergeng — 
 
 2. £)te beutfche (Sprache 86 
 
 3. -Der fterbenbe ©chiton 87 
 
 4. £>er #anbfd)uh 89 
 
PRONUNCIATION 
 
 GERMAN LANGUAGE. 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 THE ALPHABET OR THE ELEMENTARY SOUNDS AS 
 REPRESENTED BY THE LETTERS IN WRITING. 
 
 f FIGU 
 
 RES 
 
 a 
 
 \ \ NAMES 
 
 ah 
 
 VALUE 
 
 a 
 
 FIGL 
 
 RES 
 
 
 
 NAMES 
 
 oh 
 
 VAL 
 
 o 
 
 2Ce 
 
 a 
 
 se 
 
 a 
 
 £e 
 
 C 
 
 
 
 ceh 
 
 
 £3 
 
 b 
 
 bay 
 
 b 
 
 3> 
 
 p 
 
 pay 
 
 p 
 
 <s 
 
 c 
 
 tsay 
 
 c 
 
 & 
 
 q 
 
 koo 
 
 q 
 
 £> 
 
 b 
 
 day 
 
 d 
 
 3* 
 
 r 
 
 en- 
 
 r 
 
 a 
 
 e 
 
 a 
 
 e 
 
 & 
 
 f § 
 
 ess 
 
 s 
 
 8 
 
 f 
 
 eff 
 
 f 
 
 X 
 
 t 
 
 tay 
 
 t 
 
 © 
 
 9 
 
 ghay 
 
 g 
 
 u 
 
 u 
 
 00 
 
 u 
 
 £ 
 
 6 
 
 hah 
 
 h 
 
 Ue 
 
 It 
 
 ooi 
 
 
 3 
 
 i 
 
 e 
 
 i 
 
 S3 
 
 » 
 
 fou 
 
 V 
 
 S 
 
 i 
 
 yott 
 
 J 
 
 2B 
 
 w 
 
 vay 
 
 w 
 
 £ 
 
 f 
 
 kah 
 
 k 
 
 I 3E 
 
 * 
 
 iks 
 
 X 
 
 2 
 
 I 
 
 el 
 
 1 
 
 9 
 
 9 
 
 ipsilon 
 
 y 
 
 m 
 
 m 
 
 emm 
 
 m 
 
 | 3 
 
 5 
 
 tsett 
 
 z 
 
 m 
 
 n 
 
 enn 
 
 n 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 To which may be added 
 which are represented by a 
 writing, namely: 
 
 the following simple sounds, 
 combination of two letters in 
 
PRONUNCIATION OF 
 
 GL'RES 
 
 * 
 
 NAMES 
 
 tsay-hah 
 
 VALUE 
 
 ch 
 
 W 
 
 pay-hah 
 
 ph 
 
 $ 
 
 ess-tsett 
 
 sz 
 
 w 
 
 ess-tsay-hah 
 
 sch 
 
 tf> 
 
 tay-hah 
 
 th 
 
 Classifciation and Combinations of the 
 Elementary Sounds. 
 
 Vowels, 
 
 a, a, e, h x>, o, 6, u, w. 
 
 The a, o, and it, being produced from the a, o, and it, 
 by an assimilation with the e, or i, are called modified 
 sounds (Umlaute). 
 
 Diphthongs. 
 at, au, an, et, eu, ut, ou 
 
 6/ c, t>, f, 9, &, j, !, I, m, n, p, q, r, 
 
 f, t, t>, n>, x, y, $. 
 
 Most of them are used double, as : mm, nn, U, pp, tt, 
 ff, ff, &c. ; but instead of If, cf is used and instead of $, %. 
 
 Permanent Combinations of them are : — 
 
 The d), p% pf, pS, fc, f, fd), % \p, and tt). 
 ch, ph, pf, ps, sc, sz, sch, st, sp, and th. 
 
THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 3 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 PRONUNCIATION OF THE ELEMENTARY SOUNDS. 
 
 I. 
 
 Pronunciation of the Vowels. 
 
 Vowels are either long or short (sharp). 
 
 A Vowel is long : 
 
 1. When (according to the rules of spelling)* it closes a 
 syllable, as : SSa^ter, ge^bett, 3-9*1. 
 
 2> When it is followed by only one consonant in the 
 same syllable, as: ^ab-fttcfyt, ttac^bar. 
 
 3. When followed by a mute f), as : $fu)m, ©ofyle, 
 mafcnen. 
 
 4. When doubled, as: @aat, ©eelc, 5Ulo6r* 
 
 5. The vowel t moreover is long, when joined with an 
 e, as : mef, fileb, Srieb. 
 
 Obs. 1. In many particles and monosyllabic form-words, f 
 the vowels have the sharp sound, although followed by one 
 
 * "When the length or sharpness of a vowel is to be decided, the division 
 of syllables is, strictly taken, not to be effected according to the rules of 
 spelling, but conformably to the principles of the formation of words ; 
 yet the first named mode of division is generally preferred, when both 
 methods may be indifferently used as to the result. Agreeably to the prin- 
 ciples of formation, the words : %$atet/ £eben^ would be divided: SSat^er/ 
 £eb=ero and thus the vowels a and e f in SSat and Zeb, would also be long, 
 being followed by one consonant only. 
 
 + Words are either notional words or form-words. Notional words are 
 
4 PRONUNCIATION OF 
 
 consonant only, as: ab f ob, an, am, htn/ urn, im, in, mit, meg/ oon/ 
 rem/ ba5/ be§/ n>a$, ob, man, bin/ jum. 
 
 Obs. 2. In all unaccented syllables of derivation and in- 
 flexion, the sound of the vowels is weak, as : (Seele 5 2e=ben 5 
 be;(ef)=en. 
 
 A vowel is short (sharp) : 
 
 1. When followed by a double consonant, as: bb, t>t>, 
 pp, tt, ff, £, 99, II, mm, tut, rr, <f, & as: (Ebbe, SBtbber, 
 fd)leppen, ftyfoff, gflaffc* 
 
 2 . Or when followed by two or more different conson ants, 
 as: rt>, nb, xt, It, jf, &c as: gajl, «£>ant>, fyart, -2Selt, 
 £tuft, ©unjt, £opf. 
 
 Ofo. 1. Before d)/ fa> and £ (fts), the vowels are in some cases 
 sharp, in others long ; but most frequently sharp, as : ladjen/ 
 tofd)ett/ #ej:e. 
 
 Obs. 2. When (as in some tenses of the verbs) two conso- 
 nants are brought together near a vowel in consequence of 
 elision, the vowels preserve their long sound, as : lebt (for 
 lebet)/ the vowel i, in the second syllable being omitted ; lobt (for 
 lobet), \bb\t (for tobejt) : fagj* (for fagejt) 5 *)abt (for fyaUt). 
 
 Obs. 3. In some particular words the long sound of the 
 vowels is also exceptionally preserved, although the latter are 
 followed by two or more consonants, as : 
 
 2Me 2frt the species, kind, Set 23arg the perch 
 manner £>ec SSorb the board 
 
 2)er 93art the beard 2>te ©ebur-t the birth 
 
 those which express real notions, as: substantives, adjectives, and verbs. 
 Form-words do not express notions but only the relations which the notions 
 bear to each other in a sentence, as : conjunctions, prepositions, adverbs. 
 
THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 
 
 Sa§ #arj the rosin 
 
 Ser v^arg the Harz (mountain) 
 
 Ser #eerb the hearth 
 
 bocrjjt highest* 
 Ser $rebg the crab, crawfish 
 Sie SCtfagb the maid-servant 
 Ser SKonb the moon 
 
 ndd)ft next 
 
 nebft together with, (be- 
 sides) 
 Sag 5bjt the fruit 
 Set spabft the pope 
 
 Sag ^Pfetb the horse 
 Ser spropft the provost 
 Ser £Umr5 the quartz 
 Sag <Sd)it>ert the sword 
 
 jletg always 
 Set Srojt the comfort 
 Ser SSogt the bailiff 
 Sie SOSuj! the filth, trash 
 
 rcmjt desert, desolate 
 Sec SSuftltng the rake 
 Sie £>ftetn easter 
 
 gatt tender, delicate. 
 
 Pronunciation of the 
 
 1. The sound of the a, when long, is that of the French 
 or Italian long a in pate, amare. The English #, as pro- 
 nounced in father comes perhaps near to it; but the sound 
 of the German a ought always to be perfectly clear and 
 pure, neither broad, nor participating of that of any other 
 vowel, as: SSater, 9kmen, 2Cmalie, §ab, £abfal. 
 
 2. The sharp sound of the a is equal to that of the 
 French sharp a in patte, as : matt, gall, <Sd)all, fcfylaff, 
 fcfyafim 
 
 The sound of the English a, as pronounced in the word 
 paralysis, appears to approximate to it. 
 
 The double a (aa) is in sound perfectly similar to the 
 long simple a, as : (Scfyaaf, S^aax, baax. 
 
 * In the word : r;od)/ high, the vowel is long, but in ^Od)§eit, wedding, 
 it is sharp. 
 
 B 3 
 

 PRONUNCIATION OF 
 
 1. When lone/, like the English a in hare, as: faring, 
 stager, 5ifldf)t\ 
 
 •2. When sharp, like e in less, as: IdjTtg, prdcfyttg, (Sdfte. 
 
 O65. In words taken from the Latin, which have in German 
 assumed the termination tat, as: 2Cffinitdt/ ©rcmt&t/ the d has 
 the sound of the English a in name. 
 
 Z. 
 
 The e has four different sounds : 
 
 1. The long and close, equal to that of the English a 
 in name, as: 3^er, SBefymutr), £ReI). This sound it assumes: 
 
 a. When it is doubled, as : (See, £(ee/ £eer ; SDceer. 
 
 b. In words of foreign origin, as : planer, $poet/ 
 
 $>ropfyet. 
 
 c. When standing before an f) which is not followed 
 
 by a consonant, as : (Sfye, rce^e/ ftetjeri/ gefjen/ &c. 
 In many words it takes, however, also the 
 close sound, though the |) be followed by a con- 
 sonant, as : lefyneti/ belefynen, etjrem lefyrem fet)ren. 
 
 2. The Zo?^ and open, similar to that of the English a 
 in hare, or like that of the French i in mere, as : Seben, 
 gebert, IBeferu This sound it takes : 
 
 a. When standing simple (not double). 
 
 b. When not accompanied by an §, as : UUn, geben, 
 
 treten/ (Srbe, (Sd)raefel/ SSefen, ^rei>e(/ &c. 
 
 In the words, ebel/ elenbj (Sfel/ the radical c has 
 however, exceptionally, the close sound. 
 
 c. When accompanied by an \), followed by a conso- 
 
 nant, as : &tyle, fefyten 3— though there are many 
 words in which it assumes, in this case also, the 
 close sound, as : fetjr/ mefyr/ eijren/ &c. 
 
THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 7 
 
 3. The sharp and slender, like that of the English e 
 in melt, as : SBelt, §eit>, fcfynell, ketltt, which it invariably 
 takes when followed by two consonants. 
 
 Obs. The ty which in the middle of a word or syllable always 
 lengthens the preceding vowel, does in this case not count for 
 a consonant. 
 
 4. The sharp and weak, which it assumes in all unac- 
 cented syllables of derivation and inflexion, whether they 
 precede or follow the radical syllable, and which is similar 
 to that of the French acute e, faintly articulated, as : 
 be^gtaben, ge-liebt, ent^efyren, jer^reigen, %\\Ui, greufce. 
 
 In the final syllable en, this sound perfectly resembles 
 the weak and indistinct sound of the English e in the 
 final syllables en (sudden, smitte?z), as: fmben, bitten, 
 lieben, ©artetu 
 
 Obs. 1. After an t the e is mute and only serves to lengthen 
 the sound of the t/ as : 2ieb> S)teb (leeb, deeb). 
 
 Obs. 2. The double e (ee) has always the sound of the long and 
 close simple e j but when two e's/ belonging to different syllables, 
 meet close to each other in a word, each e assumes its appro- 
 priate sound. For instance the e in the prefix be of the words 
 beerben and beetjren/ is sharp and weak, because the prefix be is 
 a syllable of derivation ; but the initial e of the syllable er in the 
 first word is long and open, whilst that of the syllable fy in the 
 second word is long and close. 
 
 1. When long, like ee in bee : $Rint, ttriber, mix. 
 
 2. When sharp, like the English i in bit : Utttx, Sftinne, 
 
 Obs. 1. — WTien the i is lengthened by the addition of e, as 
 in SSiene/ Stebe, the combined sound of the te differs in nothing 
 from that of the long t. This mode of pronunciation, however 
 
8 PRONUNCIATION OF 
 
 only takes place, when the syllable in which the ie is contained, 
 has the accent ; otherwise the i, and the e are pronounced sepa- 
 rately, as : (5om6b=i=e, $amit=i=e. 
 
 Obs. 2. — The sound of the long English i in mine, like, is 
 represented in German by the diphthong et, as : meim mine ; 
 bctn/ thine. 
 
 In sound equal to the (German) i, as : Snip, 3)gel, 
 (Bprup, Its use is confined at present to words of Greek 
 origin; though some grammarians have preserved it 
 as an orthographical sign of distinction in words of the 
 same sound, but of different signification, as : feitt, his ; 
 few, to be. 
 
 It is never used as a consonant in German. 
 
 0* 
 
 1. When long, like the English o in bone, tone, as : SSofyne/ 
 Son, fOto&tu 
 
 2. When sharp, like the English o in dissolve, lot, as : 
 gotterte, ©ott, 2Bort, 9ttoft, ££onne, (Sonne. 
 
 The sound of the o, when double, is the same as that 
 of the long simple o, as : SiftooS, SSoot, 9ttoor. 
 
 1. When long, like the French ceu in vceu, as: $6be(, 
 4)ofyle, &6mg. 
 
 2. When s/wr£, somewhat sharper than en in pen, and 
 similar to the English u in murder, as: ^olte, 3oHnev, 
 mocbte, Softer. 
 
THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 
 
 1. When long, like oo in boot, as: £3ube, SiJhttfy, SpUt, 
 •2. When sharp, like a in full: 9tuft, SSunb, ©tuttbe* 
 
 1. When forc^, like the French u in flute, as: mttfce, 
 @d)uter, fufytu 
 
 2. When sharp, like the French ?* in fosse, bktte, as : 
 muffen, Gutter, jtunjle, $ittle. 
 
 II. 
 
 Pronunciation of the Diphthongs. 
 
 Diphthongs are always long, and never followed by two 
 consonants, except in cases of elision. 
 
 at (at)), equal in sound to the English y in sky, as: 
 £atfer, SBaife* 
 
 an, like ou in house, as : S3au, blau, S^U/ <£mu§* 
 
 dtt, similar to oi in cloister, but participating more of 
 the sound of the a, as: SD^dufe, ȣ)dufer. 
 
 et (ety), similar to the long English i in fine, as: fetn, 
 33let, bet* 
 
 The et), which is perfectly similar in sound to the et, 
 is at present seldom used in genuine German words. 
 
]0 PRONUNCIATION OF 
 
 eu, similar to au, but participating more of the e* The 
 sound of the English diphthong oi, as pronounced in the 
 words toil, boil, will come nearnest to it, though that of 
 the German eu, is somewhat fuller, as: getter (foi-er), %zute, 
 £)eutfd), tyzun, 33eute. 
 
 ot, (op) the same as in English, as : 33ot, SBtotfyan. It 
 occurs only in a few proper names. 
 
 tri, like ooi, as: pfui (pfooi), f)Ut. 
 
 III. 
 
 Pronunciation of the Consonants. 
 
 b,bb. 
 
 1. At the begining of a word or syllable the b sounds 
 like the English b. 
 
 2. At the end of a word or syllable, chiefly when pre- 
 ceded by a consonant, it is generally somewhat hardened, 
 so as to approach in sound to p, as: £)teb (deep), fyalb (halp). 
 
 When however the word which it terminates, is in- 
 creased by inflexion, the b, resumes the soft sound, as : 
 3Meb (deep), T)kbz§ (deebes, not deepes) ; jtalb (kalp), 
 StalbtZ (kalbes, not kalpes). 
 
 In the double b ibb), each b has the soft sound, as : 
 £rabbe, ®bbt. 
 
 1. Before a, 0, U, and a\X, likewise before a consonant, 
 and when terminating a syllable, the c is pronounced 
 
THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 11 
 
 hard like f, as: Q>ato, @rofu3, ©pectafel (kato, krosus, 
 spektakel). 
 
 2. Before the other vowels and diphthongs (e, i, d, 6, 
 U, X), &c.) it is pronounced like $ (fa), as : Cicero, @dfar, 
 Golibat, Centaur, Geplon (tsitsero, tsasar, tsblibat, 
 tsentaur, &c.) 
 
 When c is the final letter of a syllable, which is followed 
 by another beginning with a c, the final c is pronounced 
 like f , whilst the pronunciation of the initial c in the next 
 syllable is regulated by the vowel which follows, as : 
 2Cccent — 2Cc^cent (ak-tsent) ; but ac^commobirett (ak-kom- 
 modiren) . 
 
 In a few proper names it is also pronounced like f, 
 before d, 6, and it, as: ddrntfyett, (Sofa, Sujirfa (karnthen, 
 &c). 
 
 In genuine German words the c is at present never used, 
 the f and the g, which are equal to c in sound, being 
 employed instead. 
 
 Instead of cc or f!, at the end of a syllable, cf is used 
 in writing, as : ©lucf, SRocf ♦ 
 
 b, t>0, bt. 
 
 b, at the beginning of a syllable, like the English d, but 
 at the end more like t, as : 33ab, Blab, Ǥanb (bat, rat, 
 hant). 
 
 When the word it terminates is increased by inflexion, 
 it resumes the soft sound, as : $Rai> f Sftdber (rat, rader), 
 
 In the double b (O'O), each b has the soft sound, as : 
 fibber, 2U>ber, 
 
 \)t is equal to a simple t* 
 
12 PRONUNCIATION OF 
 
 f,ff. 
 
 
 In all positions, and single or double, perfectly as in 
 English, as: geoer, gall, gunb, Coffer, ©toff, ©djrcefei, 
 SSolf, 
 
 1. At the beginning of a word or syllable the 9 is hard, 
 and perfectly equal in sound to the English g in God, 
 give, as: ©ott, Qteb, @l&(f« 
 
 °2. At the end of a word or syllable it assumes either 
 a soft and guttural, or a soft and palatal sound. 
 
 When preceded by a, 0, u, or an, it takes the guttural 
 sounds which is similar to that of the Scotch ch 
 in loch, but much softer, as : Sag/ bug, bog. 
 After ti t, a, 6/ U/ et, eu/ and du, as well as after a 
 liquid consonant, it has a soft palatal sound, re- 
 sembling that of the English y in yes, year, &c, 
 as : ewig, (Sieg, £rieg, SBeg/ 23erg/ SBalg/ 3eug, ffcetg. 
 
 The final g also preserves its soft guttural or palatal 
 sound : — 
 
 a. When accompanied by t> or t : Sagb, 9Xagt>/ sprebtgt. 
 
 6. In cases of elision, as : tiaat (trdget), ftetgt (jteiget). 
 
 c. When the word which it terminates is increased by 
 inflexion, as : &rieg, ^rtegseS i Sag/ Sag^eS, £ag=en* 
 or when the original rootsyllable of the word 
 has been increased by one or more letters of 
 formation, as : Sila&z, £t&g=er. But when in the 
 middle of a word the g is the initial of a syllable, 
 it maintains, of course, its hard initial sound, 
 
 hard hard hard soft hard hard 
 
 as : beisgefiellt, bio^ge^gebeti/ roeg-g^gebcn. 
 
THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 13 
 
 3. Preceded by n, the g has the hard initial sound, 
 whilst both letters moreover melt into a peculiar palatal 
 nasal sound, similar to that of the English ng in sing, song, 
 sung, as: ftng, fmgen, ©ang, eng, ©efang, 2fngjf* 
 
 This, of course, does not apply to cases in which the g 
 belongs not to the syllable in which the n is contained, 
 as : un^gern, att-gefefyn, in both of which examples each of 
 the two letters has its natural simple sound. 
 
 4. In words derived from the French, the g is pro- 
 nounced as in French, as : ©enie, Soge, ©age* 
 
 5. In words taken from the Latin and Greek, it has 
 the hard initial sound. In some of these words however, 
 chiefly before e, the soft sound seems to be generally 
 preferred, as: ©eneral (yeneral), ©entmL 
 
 In the double g (gg) the soft sound ought to prevail, 
 as: (ggge (eyye). 
 
 *>♦ 
 
 1. As an initial letter the i) is strongly aspirated, as: 
 £>aar, £imb, £>au§* 
 
 2. In the middle of a word, as the final letter of a 
 roo^-syllable, followed by an unaccented syllable, its aspira- 
 tion is less strong, as : SDKifye, fefyen, fltefyen* 
 
 3. As the final letter x)f a word and before I, m, n, r, it 
 is perfectly mute, as: raufy, *£ut), ftttf), ^Pfafyl, lafym, <Sofyrt, 
 
 It is sometimes merely used as a sign by which the 
 length of the vowels is indicated, as: ©taf)t, ©tufyl, 33afym 
 
 Combined with the t, it only serves to prolong the 
 sound of the former, as: SEfyurm, Xtyat, SDfcuflj). 
 
 The tf) never assumes a sound like that which it has in 
 the English thine, thorn, $*c. 
 
14 PRONUNCIATION OF 
 
 *. 
 
 With the exception of the words : (Sfyarfreitag, Good 
 Friday, and (Styaxwofyz, the Holy Week, in which the &} 
 has the sound of f, it is in words of true German origin 
 never used as an initial, but only as a final letter, and has 
 as such either a guttural or a palatal sound, namely : — 
 
 1. After a, 0, u, and an, its sound is guttural, resembling 
 that of the Scotch ch in loch, or the Irish gh in lough, 
 or the Spanish x in dexar, being however not so deeply 
 guttural as in the adduced examples, as : £)acfy, $fla$)t, 
 Sod), £ud), ©traud), fRaufy. 
 
 2. After e, i, a, o, u, du, and eu, or a consonant, its 
 sound is less guttural and more palatal, similar to that 
 of the Scotch gh in light, as : Stcfyt, ^edrt, bidder, welcber, 
 manner. It has the same sound in the syllable d)en 
 of diminutives, as : S&o^en, ,ftittb-cfyen* 
 
 3. Before an 3, which belongs to the same root-syllable, 
 d) sounds like cf, that is : d)§ like x, as : £Bad)§ (wacks, 
 wax) ; gud)§ (fux) ; 2Cd)fe, £)$fe. 
 
 But when the 3, being the initial of another syllable 
 of derivation or composition, does not belong to the same 
 syllable as the d), as well as before the elision of e, the 
 d) retains the guttural or palatal sound, as : tt>ad)-fam, 
 9ladHt<$t, SBu#3 (S5ud)e§), ©fritf* (©tric&eS). 
 
 4. In Greek words, where it stands as an initial, it is 
 regularly pronounced like k, as : @f)or, Gfyrifi, Gtyronif 
 (krist, kronik). 
 
 There are, however, also a great number of words, 
 derived from the Greek and Hebrew, in which it assumes 
 the palatal sound, as : GfyaoS, Ctyemte, Gtyirurg, Gfytroman- 
 tie, Gfyerub, Cherubim, &c. 
 
THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 15 
 
 5. In French words it maintains its national sound, 
 namely that of the English sh, as : Charlotte, Chicane, 
 (Styaoalter (sharlotte, shicane, &c). 
 
 j , consonant. 
 
 Like the English consonant y in year, as : Satyr, Seber, 
 Sod) (yahr, yeder). 
 
 !,& 
 
 The same as in English, as : jtorb, teller, Jttnb, &anf, 
 $ahn, Stlo$. 
 
 It is never mute before n, but pronounced as if fol- 
 lowed by a very short e, as : JSnabe, Sink, f narren, (not : 
 nabe, nie, narren). 
 
 Preceded by n, both letters united assume a palatal 
 nasal sound, similar to that in thank, think, as: £)anf, 
 ginfe, trmfetu But when the f does not belong to the 
 same syllable as the n, each of the two letters maintains 
 its original simple sound, as : (Em-flang, 2Cn^f Uttft. 
 
 Instead of f f, (f is used, when the sharp sound of the 
 preceding vowel is to be indicated. 
 
 UL 
 I, the same as in English, as : getb, Sofytt, gob, ©elb, 
 
 It is never mute like in the English talk, walk, &c. 
 
 The double I (U) sharpens, as two consonants always 
 do, the preceding vowel, and the words : SfiSatt, gall, are 
 consequently pronounced wall, fall, (not wauhl, fauhl). 
 
 In French and Spanish words the double I (11) maintains 
 its national sound. 
 
16 PRONUNCIATION OF 
 
 The m and n are pronounced as in English. The 
 nasal sound which the n assumes before 9 and I, has 
 been mentioned in the rules touching these two letters. 
 
 p, fy>, #, pf, pf. 
 
 1. The p is pronounced as in English : papier, $)la^ 
 sprinj, ©prttp. 
 
 2. The double p (pp) is used after a sharp vowel, as : 
 ^lepper, ^lippe, ©ruppe* 
 
 3. The pf) has the sound of f, as: SPfyttofopfy (filosof), 
 (Sp^eu (efeu). 
 
 4. The pf is to be pronounced as it is written, that is : 
 the p and the f are each distinctly but rapidly to be 
 articulated, as: ^f^erb — SPferb, (not pert or fert), 
 $PflicH 9)fau, empfmben, empfefylen* 
 
 5. The pf requires likewise a distinct articulation of 
 each of the two letters, as : tyzfcalm — SPfatm ; $ftttig. 
 
 The q is always accompanied by the vowel u, in unison 
 with which it is pronounced like the English kv, as: 
 £lua( (kval), Quelle (kvelle), qudlen, queer. 
 
THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 17 
 
 X, XX. 
 
 The German r is pronounced with greater force and 
 shrillness than the English, as: better, Stand), retten, 
 Sfcofyr, S^etcfy, vgeer, mefyr. 
 
 In combination with § (ffti)), the v) is mute, as in 
 English, as : ber Sfcfyetn, the Rhine ; IRfyinoceroS, itatarrf)* 
 
 The double r (rr), is used to indicate the sharp sound 
 of the preceding vowel, as : Sfrtxx, SSlaxx, fyatr-en. It 
 ought to be articulated with increased force, precision 
 and shrillness. 
 
 , f/ 3, % If/ fc, fd), % ft- 
 
 1. The long initial f (©, f) before a vowel or diph- 
 thong at the beginning of a word, or in the middle be- 
 tween two vowels, has a soft sound, like the English s in 
 rose, rosy, or the English z in zeal, as : fefyen, ftigert, 
 $3ufen, retfen. 
 
 2. As final 3, when it is always written thus (6), its 
 sound is more accute, resembling that of the English s in 
 so, this, as: (§ra$, Spau§, ©la§, (5t§. 
 
 When a word is increased by inflexion, the long (soft) 
 f is used again, it being then considered as the initial of 
 the additional syllable, as : ©ra6, ©ra^feS, (gig, (EUfeS. 
 
 3. The g is never used at the beginning of a word, 
 and ought only to be employed after a long vowel or 
 diphthong, it being intended to express a sharp hissing 
 sound after a long vowel. 
 
 The sound of this letter is that of a pure sharp §, and 
 has no admixture of the § (fa), as : ©ruj? (groos), 
 
 When a word, ending in fj, is increased by inflexion, f , 
 c 3 
 
18 PRONUNCIATION OF 
 
 not jf, ought also to be used, for the ff would render the 
 vowel sharp, as : ©ru£, ©utfjeS ; $fla$, SSftageS. But in 
 the formation of words by means of derivation, the £ fre- 
 quently changes into ff, and the ff into % as: fliefjen, 
 floff, gluff ; nriffen, to know ; (id)) xvti$, (I) know. 
 
 4. The ff is a double s, and, like every double conso- 
 nant, only to be used after a sharp vowel. It is the 
 sharpest of the hissing sounds, and perfectly like the 
 English double s in hissing, as : mtffen, ttrifTen, effen, 
 laffen, gaff, $offe, 9tuffe, &c 
 
 When a word, ending in ff, is increased by inflexion, 
 ff is to be used, not fj, as : gluff, gluffeS ; gaff, gaffed. 
 
 That in derivative formations the fjj and ff sometimes 
 interchange with each other, has already been observed. 
 
 5. fc before a, 0, U, or a consonant, like sk, as : @clat>e 
 (sklave), (scorpion. Before d, e, i, o, it, eu, like sts, 
 as : ©C-fcp-feo (stsipio). 
 
 In modern orthography the § is often used instead, 
 as : Septer (tsepter), Qipio (tsipio). 
 
 6. The fd) is pronounced like the English sh in shine, 
 shoe, as: fcfyeinen (shinen), @d)uf) (shoo). 
 
 The vowels before this character are sometimes long, 
 as: ttmfcfyen, brdfcfyett, but more frequently sharp, as: 
 nmfcfyen, brefcfyen. 
 
 When, as in diminutives formed in ctyen, the f and the 
 cfy belong to different syllables, they are also to be pro- 
 nounced separately, as: tg)du6^d)en, SDfcduS^cfyen, 3£6§-cben. 
 
 7. ff and fp are pronounced as in English in stone, 
 spy, that is : each letter is to be clearly and distinctly 
 articulated, as: ftefyen (stehen) not schtehen, as in some 
 provinces ; fprecfyen (sprechen), not schprec.hen; iff (ist), 
 not ischt ; ©pracfye, ©treit, ©pieg, <5t\xfyL 
 
THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 19 
 
 t, U, % ht 
 
 1. The t has the sound of the English t in time, hat, 
 as : Sag, Sugenb, $\xt. 
 
 In Foreign words the t before t, when the i is followed 
 by another vowel, and the syllable ti not accented, is 
 pronounced like $ (ts), as: Elation (natsion), portion 
 (portsion). 
 
 But when the accent lies upon the syllable ti, the hard 
 sound of the t is preserved, as : 9fttltiabe3, $)artle, 2)emo^ 
 fratle* 
 
 2. The double t (tt) is used to indicate the sharp 
 sound of the preceding vowel, as : ®ott, SSetter, better, 
 Gutter, 
 
 3. The ti) is pronounced like a simple t, the f) added to 
 the t being considered merely as a sign that the vowel 
 preceding or following is to be pronounced long, as : Xfyal 
 (tal), $§ier, £f)on, Smutty (moot), £otf), mkti)^ 
 
 Exception : In the word SBirtfy the i is sharp, 
 tfy never has the sound of the English th, or the 
 Greek 6. 
 
 4. bt is perfectly equal to a simple t, as : (Stabt, 
 ©efanbter, ©ewanbtfyett 
 
 t>* 
 
 The sound of the t>, at the beginning or end of a syllable 
 or word, is perfectly equal to f, as: Skter (fater), SSerS 
 (fers), tiolt (foil), brat) (braf). 
 
 In the middle of a word it ought, according to some 
 grammarians, to assume a softer sound, resembling that 
 
20 PRONUNCIATION OF 
 
 of the English v, as: grcttel (frevel), SPufoer (pulver), 
 Sttafoe (malve). 
 
 In words derived from the French, it is pronounced 
 as in French, as : (Sarna&al, ©ermette, £it>ree. 
 
 In words from other foreign languages, it is articulated 
 by some with the hard sound of f, by others with the 
 soft sound of t), as: SSenuS (venus and fenus), (Hamer 
 (clavier and clafier). 
 
 The sound of the German n) is perfectly represented 
 by that of the French or Italian v in valear, valore, as : 
 SBa&I, SBes, SBclt, SEBetn. 
 
 The sound of the English v, when divested of its ad- 
 mixture of the f, comes very near to it; but the student 
 ought to be particularly cautious not to confound the 
 sound of the German xo with that of the English w 9 the 
 round and full sound of the latter being entirely strange 
 to the German n% 
 
 The German n> is never mute before r and f), as the 
 English in write, whole. 
 
 Obs. The w was originally formed from u u 5 thus in a few 
 words it still retains the sound of U/ as : (Srcer (@uer). (Spanborc 
 (@panbau)/ (Scfyanbom ((Scfyjnbau). 
 
 The y, as well at the beginning as in the middle or at 
 the end of a word, has the sound of ks, as: 2frt (akst), 
 Compel (eksempel), XerreS (kserkses), ^)eye (hekse). 
 
 
 
THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 21 
 
 The § is pronounced like ts, as : %>afy (tsahl), %z\t 
 (tsite), £et§ (herts) ; %x%t (artst). The sound of the 
 t in the combination of the two sounds (ts) ought to be 
 particularly marked. 
 
 When the $ is to be doubled, in order to indicate the 
 sharp sound of the preceding vowel, % and not fo, is 
 used in writing. 
 
 % is pronounced t-ts, as : fe^en (set-tsen), 
 
 (kat-tse). 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 ARTICULATION OF THE ELEMENTARY SOUNDS 
 WHEN FORMING THE CONSTITUENT PARTS OF 
 THE SYLLABLES AND WORDS. 
 
 Rule. — Every elementary sound (letter) in a syllable 
 or word is to be distinctly articulated according to its 
 proper sound, as denned in the rules on the pronuncia- 
 tion of the letters. 
 
 From hence it naturally follows, that the effective sound 
 of a syllable ought strictly to convey the sound total of 
 the different elementary sounds contained therein. 
 
 Thus we spell and pronounce : — 
 
 SB*r*osb = S5rob. ©dUb = @&b. 
 SBsestet = SSSett. @W*fc*f = ©tucf. 
 
 Dsfsesrsb= 9>ferb. te&Vt = Stall. 
 
"22 PRONUNCIATION OF 
 
 The general and fundamental principle of the pro- 
 nunciation of the German language is therefore con- 
 tained in the following words : 
 
 SPEAK AS YOU WRITE. 
 
 The few modifications to which this fundamental law 
 is subject, will be remembered from the rules on the 
 pronunciation of the elementary sounds, and are sum- 
 marily expressed as follows : — 
 
 1 . Every vowel has a long and a sharp sound. 
 
 2. The vowel e admits of four different sounds. (Seep. 6.) 
 
 3. The consonant c is pronounced like k before 0/ o f u f and 
 
 like ts (§) before the other vowels. 
 
 4. The letter g is hard like the English #, at the beginning, 
 
 and soft and palatal at the end of a syllable. 
 
 5. The d) has a guttural sound after a f 0, n, and au# and a 
 
 palatal one after and before the other vowels. Before 
 an 3/ which belongs to the same root- syllable, it sounds 
 like ck — and before a t Qt n f or a consonant in foreign 
 words, like k. 
 
 6. The p§ assumes the sound of/, as: sp^ttofopty (filosof). 
 
 7. The qu sounds like kv, as : DueUe (kvelle). 
 
 8. The fc sounds like sk before a> 0, u f or a consonant, and 
 
 like sts before &, z, i, b f u, and eu. 
 
 9. The fd) sounds like the English sh, as : fd)einen (shlnen). 
 
THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 23 
 
 CHAPTER IV, 
 
 SPELLING. 
 
 Spelling, or the method of reading words by dis- 
 tinctly and separately articulating every letter in a 
 syllable and every syllable in a word, includes not only 
 a due knowledge of the precise sounds of the letters, 
 but also an acquaintance with the rules, established in a 
 language for the decomposition of words. 
 
 In German, the decomposition, or division of words 
 into syllables for the purpose of spelling, is not effected 
 according to the letters of the root (that is, according to 
 the formation of the words), but according to the con- 
 veniency of pronunciation. Thus, the word SSater is not 
 divided: §8at-er,asit ought to be, comformable to its for- 
 mation, but: SSa-ter ; it being more easy for pronunciation 
 to begin a syllable with a consonant, than with a vowel. 
 
 Established Rules for the Division of Words into 
 Syllables for the Purpose of Spelling.* 
 
 1. A vowel following close after a diphthong in the 
 same word forms the initial of a new syllable, as : 
 9ftau-er, Gn^er, (£u^er, tfyeiuer. 
 
 * Monosyllables not being subject to division, these rules will, of course, 
 only apply to dissyllabic and polysyllabic words. 
 
24 PRONUNCIATION OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 
 
 2. A consonant between two vowels, or between a 
 diphthong and a vowel, is to be considered as the initial 
 of the next syllable, as: fef)en, fe-l;en ; (Segert, ©e-gen ; 
 Scbcn, gc^bcn ; Srdume, Srdu^me. 
 
 3. When two consonants are between two vowels, the 
 first consonant is to form the final letter of the preceding ; 
 
 the second, the initial letter of the following syllable, as : 
 £etren, $er^ren ; gveunbe, greun-be ; rating, nnUltg ; 
 £olle, SfcbWz 5 SSUltgl tit, SBiUifrMt. 
 
 4. The compound letters cfy, cf, pf), pf, fty, fp, jf, % if), 
 and |, are considered as one character only, and not 
 separated. They belong to the preceding syllable when 
 a consonant, to the next, when a vowel follows them, as : 
 ©a^djje, fdd)4icfy, ftecfyen, ba^cfen, fcfytm^pfen, $Pro~pf)et, 
 SSJlen-fcfyen, menfct)4ic^, genera, rdt^ltd), nu^licr), nu^en. 
 
 The pf and fp may, however, be separated, as : &rop^ 
 fen, flop^fen itnoS-pe, SSes^pe* 
 
 5. Compound words and derivatives formed by pre- 
 fixes, ought strictlv to be divided as they are compounded, 
 as: 2Cugsapfel, ^rb^rec^t, £)ant^opfer, £)onner^tag, bar-auS, 
 fyer^etn, fytn^auS, ttor^an, enteerben, er^tnnem, au^erlefett, 
 nueber^um, be^iebt, ge4tebt» 
 
 The convenience of pronunciation being, however, 
 the first law in the method of spelling, compounds are 
 also not unfrequently divided agreeably to the principles 
 of the decomposition of simple words, as : beobacbten is 
 divided: beo^bacfyten, instead of beob^adjten; ttoltenben, 
 t>ol4enben, instead of aolfcenben ; empftnben, em-pfmben, 
 instead of emp-fmben, &c. 
 
EXERCISES 
 
 PRONUNCIATION OF THE ELEMENTARY 
 
 SOUNDS. 
 
27 
 
 EXERCISES ON THE PRONUNCIATION OF 
 THE ELEMENTARY SOUNDS. 
 
 As it is intended that the student should occasionally 
 and separately practise these exercises for some period, 
 even after having thoroughly completed the perusal of 
 the treatise, it has been considered more comformable 
 to the purpose, and to the student's convenience, briefly 
 to repeat here the most essential rules touching the 
 pronunciation of each letter, than to refer him solely to 
 the preceding chapter. 
 
 I. 
 
 Exercises on the Long and Sharp Sound 
 of the Vowels. 
 
 General Rule, — Vowels are sharp when followed by 
 two or more consonants in the same syllable; in all 
 other cases they are long. (See p. 3, Pronunciation of 
 the Elementary Sounds.) 
 
 <u 
 
 1. When long, like the French long a in pate, or 
 similar to the English a in father. 
 
 2. When sharp, like the French short a in patte. 
 
 ©ditaf, fdjlaff* £afen, fyxtfen ; Stafjl, (Stall | 
 
 Sleep, slack; hook, to chop; steel, stable; 
 
 lam, ^ammj ®aat, fattj ©taar, ftarr 5 
 
 (he) came, comb; seed, satiated; starling, benumbed; 
 
 ®taat f ©tabt; Sa$l, SEall* fa$l, gall. 
 
 state, city; choice, rampart; fallow, fall. 
 
28 
 
 EXERCISES ON 
 
 a. 
 
 1. When long, like the English a in hare, as : paving. 
 % When sharp, like the English e in less, as : Kijttg. 
 
 (Stat, 
 
 Stable (fixed), 
 galjnen, . Sinner; 
 to yawn, January; 
 
 Saber, SSante. 
 baths, volumes. 
 
 et&tte 5 
 
 stead (place) ; 
 ©dbet/ ©dttet 5 
 sabre, saddles; 
 
 93iaf)ne, banner j 
 mane, men ; 
 vg)dt)ne/ £anbe i 
 cocks, hands ; 
 
 The ehas four different sounds: — 
 
 1. The long and close, like that of the English a in 
 name. (See p. 6.) 
 
 2. The long and open, equal to the English a in hare. 
 
 3. The sharp and slender, like that of the English e 
 in melt, which it always takes when followed by two 
 consonants. 
 
 4. The sharp and weak, which it assumes in all un- 
 accented syllables of derivation and inflexion, and which 
 is similar to that of the French acute e, faintly articulated. 
 In the final syllables en, this sound perfectly resembles 
 the weak and indistinct sound of the English e in the 
 final syllable en, in sudderc, smittew, as : ©art-en, SfcyxtUzn. 
 
 Long 
 and close. 
 
 £eer, 
 
 sharp and Long Sharp and 
 slender. and open. slender. 
 
 £err , fret)len, ftellen } 
 
 Long 
 and close. 
 
 jef)ren 
 
 
 Army 
 
 , Sir (master); (to) steal, (to) place ; 
 
 (to) consume. 
 
 Sharp and 
 slender. 
 
 jerren ; 
 
 Long Sharp and Long and Sharp and 
 and close. slender. open. slender. 
 
 jpefcHer, Jpelieu ; gefcl/ gell $ ' 
 
 Long 
 
 and open. 
 
 geber, 
 
 Sharp and 
 slender. 
 
 Setter * 
 
 (to) pull 
 
 ; concealer, farthing ; fault, skin ; 
 
 pen, 
 
 cousin ; 
 
 Long and 
 close. 
 
 SBeet, 
 
 Sharp and Long and Sharp and Sharp and 
 slender. close. slender. weak. 
 
 SSettj £iee, Alette* be= 
 
 Long and 
 
 Sharp and 
 weak. 
 
 en. 
 
 a flower- 
 
 bed, bed ; clover, bur ; instruct. 
 
 
THE PRONUNCIATION. 29 
 
 i (ie). 
 
 1. When long, like ee in bee. 
 
 2. When sharp, like the English i in bit. 
 S. The te is equal to the long L 
 
 sBiine, 50Rienc/ ?5JUnne 5 Sfynerv tnnen 5 Sfyven, icren 5 
 A mine, mien, love ; (to) you, within ; to your, to err ; 
 
 tvxv, nrirren 3 nnber, rctebeo UBtbbet 5 Sieb/ litt .; 
 
 we, (to) entangle ; against, again, ram; song, (he) suffered; 
 
 bieten, bitten ; VRutty, SKitte. 
 
 (to) offer, (to) beg ; rent, middle. 
 
 0. 
 
 1. When long, like in bone, tone. 
 
 2. When sharp, like in dissolve, pot. 
 
 3. When double, like the long simple 0. 
 
 Dfen, offen 5 Sfyon, Sonne 5 -ftofyl/ Poller 5 
 
 Stove, open ; clay, tun ; cabbage, madness, rage ; 
 
 ©ofjn, (Sonne j @ot)te# folte $ 2Bof)l/ SSolte 5 SXooS, 
 
 son, sun ; sole, should ; welfare, wool ; moss, 
 
 58oot, ©d)oof. 
 
 boat, lap. 
 
 e 
 
 1. When long, like the French oeu in voeu. 
 
 2. When sharp, somewhat sharper than the French eu 
 in pen, 
 
 $6fet*/ Jp&cfer$ £ofyle, #otte$ £onig/ lonnen 5 
 Higgler, bunch ; cavern, hell ; king, (to) be able ; 
 
 <St6r, ftomfd) 5 tofen, Iofd^en 5 
 
 sturgeon, stubborn ; (to) loosen, (to) extinguish ; 
 
 Wofyvtt Sorter. 
 carrot, murderer. 
 
 d3 
 
30 EXERCISES ON 
 
 It. 
 
 1 . When long, like oo in boot. — 2. When sharp, like u in full. 
 guber, gutter \ ^uber, Sutter $ 
 
 A cart-load, provender ; hair-powder, butter ; 
 
 ©djnur, (Sdinurre ; #ufrrt/ purine j SCRufyme, SKumme ; 
 
 (a) line, (a) drollery ; (a) fowl, (a) Hun ; aunt, mum (beer); 
 
 2Butr), 2Sujr. 
 
 fury, trash. 
 
 1. When long, like the French u m flute. 
 
 2. When sharp, like the French u in fusse. 
 
 gufyten, futfen; SiJlutjte, Soulier 5 (Sufyne, (Sunbe 5 
 
 (to) feel, (to) fill ; mill, miller ; atonement, sin ; 
 
 routjlen, fyutfen ; bufjen, SSufte 5 @rf)tt)ure/ 23urbe. 
 
 (to) rummage, (to) veil; (to) atone, bust; oaths, burden. 
 
 II. 
 
 Exercises on the Pronunciation of the 
 Diphthongs. 
 Rule. — Diphthongs are always long. 
 
 at* 
 Sounds like the English y in sky. 
 
 £atfer, ©rite, SSaiern, nam, SfBaib, £am, SGkttfe. 
 Emperor, chord, Bavaria, Main, woad, grove, orphan. 
 
 an. 
 Like oa in fowse. 
 
 £au6, Sauf, £auf, (Sdjaum, ©taub, SRaum, SJttauS/ 2aut. 
 House, course, bargain, froth, dust, space, mouse, sound. 
 
THE PRONUNCIATION. 31 
 
 c 
 
 an* 
 
 Similar in sound to oi in cloister. 
 
 .ft&ufer/ !>&ufer/ 23ciume, SSrdufe/ Srdume, gtauteui/ &ante. 
 Purchaser, houses, trees, brides, dreams, Miss, column. 
 
 Equal in sound to the English long i mjine. 
 
 File, avarice, Switzerland, charm, twig (bough), ice, 
 Setb/ Setbeigen. 
 harm, bond, 
 
 en. 
 
 Similar to oi in boil, toil. 
 
 Steue, (5uk/ greufce> #eu, ReuU, ^preuferi/ neu, greunb, 
 Fidelity, owl, joy, hay, club, Prussia, new, friend, 
 
 (Sprcu/ touj/ Seufel, &d)m, *ku3. 
 
 chaff, cross, devil, aversion, dread, Jupiter. 
 
 III. 
 
 Exercises on those Vowels and Diphthongs the 
 Sound of which is carefully to be distin- 
 guished in the Pronunciation. 
 
 a and L 
 
 £ater, 
 
 23ater , 
 
 Sftab, 
 
 ERdber 5 
 
 SBlatt, 
 
 SSldtter 5 
 
 Father, 
 
 fathers ; 
 
 wheel, 
 
 wheels ; 
 
 leaf, 
 
 leaves ; 
 
 %Rarm, banner. 5 Mamm, ^&mme 5 tyaftf ^affe. 
 man, men ; comb, combs ; passport, passports. 
 
32 
 
 EXERCISES ON 
 
 d and c. 
 
 Xef)ve, (S^rcj S3ar, SSecrc ; 
 
 Ear, honour ; bear, berry 
 ftat)len, ftefylen 5 
 
 (to) steel, temper, (to) steal ; 
 
 rcabren/ irefyren. 
 (to) last, (to) hinder, defend. 
 
 fagen, (Segen ; 
 
 (to) saw, blessing ; 
 
 9Jia£;r/ met)r ; 
 
 (a) tale, more ; 
 
 at, (et), and an, 
 
 £atfet/ (f)et(et), ^dufer 5 2£cu(e, (22ci(e), SXaufe; 
 
 Emperor, hoarse, houses ; orphan, manner, mice ; 
 
 ®aite, (©ette), £aute 5 Satb, (fieib)/ lauten. 
 
 chord, side, skins ; loaf, body, (to) toll. 
 
 The difference of sound between at and et is almost 
 imperceptible. 
 
 an, and an. 
 
 %a\x§, £aufer ; 5C^aug, TOufe 5 £auf, £dufe 5 
 
 House, houses ; mouse, mice ; bargain, bargains ; 
 
 gauft/ gdufte; fauer, (gaurij SSraut, S3raute. 
 
 fist, fists ; acid, acidity ; bride, brides. 
 
 e and 6. 
 
 SGSemg, 
 Little, 
 
 £ennen, 
 
 (to) know, 
 
 ?ei)ren, 
 
 (to) sweep, 
 
 ^6nig 5 
 
 king; 
 !6nnen 5 
 
 (to) can (be able) 
 f ofyren 5 
 (to) elect, chat ; 
 
 lefynen, l5ijnen ; 
 
 (to) lend, (to) pay wages ; 
 
 fefjnen/ serfofjnen ; 
 
 ; (to) long, (to) reconcile ; 
 
 mefyren/ Sjjfo^ren. 
 
 (to) increase, carrots. 
 
THE PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 i, (te), and tu 
 
 33 
 
 Singen, bimgen$ 
 To hire, (to) dung 
 btenen> £>unen 5 
 
 (to) serve, downs ; 
 fieben, <2uben 5 
 (to) boil, (the) south ; 
 
 Stnfe, Sunfe 5 ©cricfyt, ©erucl)t ,* 
 
 (a) lentil, linchpin ; dish, report ; 
 £ijte/ .ftufte 5 liegem lugen 5 
 chest, coast ; (to) lie, (to) tell a lie ; 
 Ztyev, Zt)uv$ 33tene, 33iu)ne. 
 animal, door ; bee, 
 
 et and te, 
 
 £eib, fitebj £eib/ £te&$ feiben/ ftebenj 
 
 Harm, song ; body, dear, sweetheart ; silken, (to) boil ; 
 
 5DUene/ metne 5 vkU, geile 5 ftet, fetl 5 3tete> 3?to 5 
 
 mien, mine ; many, file ; (he) fell, venal ; aims, line ; 
 
 £ett/ £tel. 
 
 wedge, keel. 
 
 and 0. 
 
 ©o^n, (So^ne 5 (Strom/ <Stt5me 5 Son/ £6ne j 
 
 Son, sons ; stream, streams ; tone, tones ; 
 
 £of)te/ £6£}(er j SSofe, SSoSdjen 5 23oget, S36get. 
 
 coal, collier; rose, a little rose ; bird, birds. 
 
 U and ft* 
 
 SBut^)/ n?utr;enb ; 
 
 rage, furious ; 
 ©ut, ©ufe 5 
 good, goodness ; 
 ©d)imr, fdjnttren. 
 
 lace (cord), (to) lace, 
 
 Gutter, 
 mother, 
 
 Gutter 5 
 mothers ; 
 
 tt-urbe/ 
 
 (he) was, became, 
 
 sRufymt rufymen* 
 glory, (to) praise ; 
 rcurbe 5 
 (he) should, would; 
 
34 EXERCISES ON 
 
 et, eu, and du. 
 
 ©tie, (Sule; geter, geuer; leister, £eud)tet$ 
 
 Haste, owl ; solemnity, fire ; easier, candlestick ; 
 
 33cei(e, 9}caufc 5 leife, Caufe 5 fyeiter, Ijeute £aute. 
 
 titmouse, mice; softly, lice; cheerful, to day, skins. 
 
 The difference between du and eu is very slight. 
 In the former the admixture of the d is prevailing, in the 
 latter that of the e. 
 
 IV. 
 
 Exercises on the Pronunciation of the 
 Consonants. 
 
 S,c. 
 
 The c is pronounced : — 
 
 1. Before a, 0, u, and an, before a consonant, and 
 when terminating a syllable, like k. 
 
 2. Before e, i, d, 6, it, and the diphthongs, except au, 
 like § (ts) . 
 
 1. ©abate, Canbtbat, College, Concurs, Copte, Colofi", 
 Cabal, candidate, colleague, concourse, copy, Colossus, 
 
 Contract/ 2lct, 2Ccten, Secret, franco, local. 
 
 contract, act, acts, deeds, decree, post-paid, local. 
 
 2. Ctrfel, Circular, Ceber, cenftren, Cicero, Ciber, 
 Compass, circular, cedar, (to) review, Cicero, cider, 
 
 Circe, Coteftine, Conobtum. 
 Circe, Celestine, Cenobium. 
 
 When c is the final letter of a syllable, which is followed 
 by another beginning with a c, the final c is pronounced 
 like I, whilst the pronunciation of the initial c in the 
 
THE PRONUNCIATION. 35 
 
 next syllable is regulated by the vowel which follows, 
 as: — 
 
 Accent (aktsent), Recife (aktsise), £)cctbent (oktsident), 
 
 Accent, excise, west, 
 
 accepttren (aktseptiren), accomobtren (akkommodiren), 
 
 (to) accept, (to) accommodate, 
 
 accrebittren (akkreditiren). 
 to open a credit. 
 
 
 *. 
 
 1. After a, 0, U, and an, guttural, similar to the Scotch 
 ch in loch, 
 
 2, After e, i, d, 6, it, a\x, and cu, or a consonant less gut- 
 tural and more palatal, similar to the Scotch gh in light. 
 
 t3. Before an $ which belongs to the same root-syl- 
 lable, like <f , that is : d)§, like cks or x. But when the 3 
 does not belong to the same syllable as the d), and before 
 the elisions of e, the 6) retains its guttural or palatal sound. 
 
 4. In Greek words it sounds like k, as: Q,i)0X (kor). 
 
 5. In French words it is pronounced as in French, 
 as : Charlotte (sharlotte). 
 
 Obs. — The vowels are generally sharp, but in some cases 
 also long before d). 
 
 3>rad)t/ £)atf), *8ebad)t, 
 pomp, roof, circumspection, 
 
 nod}/ 5Rad)ftd&t/ t)od), bod), nod), Sod), god), £od), 
 
 after (to), indulgence, high, yet, still, yoke, hole, cook, 
 
 glud), 23ud), Skud), (Sud)t, Sud), ^udjen, SSaud), 
 
 (a) curse, book, (a) rupture, passion, cloth, cake, belly, 
 33raud), Staud), (Sdtfaud), Saudjer. 
 custom, smoke, a pipe, diver. 
 
 1. %&), 2Cd)tung, 
 
 SSad), 
 
 Alas, esteem, 
 
 brook 
 
 long. 
 
 i), 9?ad)ftd)t, 
 
 long. 
 t)0d), 
 
36 
 
 EXERCISES ON 
 
 •2. tye6) f S3ted), fredb/ ftedben/ breckrt/ 
 
 Pitch, white iron, impudent, (to) sting-, (to) brea 
 (Sttd)/ gidite/ fiercer/ &ervid)t, glucc(td), tjerrlicf)/ S3dd)e/ 
 sting, pine, sure, weight, happy, excellent, brooks 
 gd&er, fad)tid), £)dd>et-/ 26d}cr, Md)t, S3ud)er, gludje 
 a fan, neuter, roofs, holes, cooks, books, curses, 
 Sfid)ec# ©d)ldud)e/ ©ebrdud)e, 9tteud)clmotb/ £eud)Icr, 
 clothes, pipes, customs, assassination, 
 
 eud)/ 23tumd)en. 
 you, a little flower. 
 
 3. 5)ad)g, 2Cd)[ei, ©reenter, gud)§, 
 
 (a) badger, shoulder, (a) turner, (a) fox, 
 SDSad)g/ vSucfcg, ©adjfen, fad)ji[d), roadmen, 
 wax, growth, shape, Saxony, Saxon, (to) grow, plant. 
 
 Words in which the f does not belong to the same 
 root-syllable as the d) I — 
 
 -2Sad)=fom, nadjsfeijcn/ nad)=fenben/ 
 
 Watchful, (to) look after, revise, to send after, 
 
 9tad>]ud)t, 9letd)=fom. 
 
 revengefulness, as it were. 
 
 (a) hypocrite, 
 
 DdjS/ fedfog, 
 ox, six, 
 ©ett>ad)S. 
 
 Cases of elision : — 
 
 SSudj'S for Sucr-eg, Sodj'fi for Sodieg, 25ad)'S for 23ad)e§. 
 Of the book, of the hole, of the brook. 
 
 Greek words: — 
 
 4. G&arafter, (Sbor, Shrift, S^ronif, Choral.* 
 Character, choir, Christ, chronicle, a choral song. 
 
 French words : — 
 
 5. Charlatan/ Styifane/ (Sbatfe/ (Stjampagner (sharlatan, &c). 
 
 * In many Greek words, the d) takes, however, also the guttural or 
 palatal sound. 
 
THE PRONUNCIATION. 37 
 
 t>, N), t, tt, tf). 
 
 1. £>, £>t>, and t, tt, as in English. 
 
 2. In foreign words the syllable tt, when followed by 
 another vowel, and not accented, is pronounced like §t 
 (tsi). But when the accent lies upon the syllable tt, the 
 hard sound of the t is preserved. 
 
 3. %f) is pronounced like a simple t, the f) being only 
 added as a sign that the vowel of the syllable is to be 
 long. 
 
 1. £aube/ Saubej 2)eitf), Setg; Sorf, Serf* 
 Staff, pigeon ; dike, paste ; village, turf ; 
 
 2)odjr, Soc^tet'5 S3ab, bat 5 
 
 (a) wick, daughter ; (a) bath, (he) begged ; 
 
 SBunb, bunt* Zaub/ Sante $ 
 
 (a) tie, alliance, coloured ; toy, aunt ; 
 
 $£abe, rcctten 3 SBibber, wtttern 5 
 
 calf of the leg, (to) wade ; (a) ram, (to) scent ; 
 
 Srobbet, Srott* £labbe, gotten. 
 
 (a) tassel, trot; first draught of a writing, Catti (a people). 
 
 2. Nation (natsion), portion (portsion), SRaiion/ 
 Nation, portion, ration, 
 
 Senetiancr, partiet. 
 
 (a) Venetian, in parts. 
 
 But SKtltlabeS (milteeades), Sortie (partee), <5$tromantie 
 (chiromantee), &c. 
 
 3. Sfyal, Zfytvt ©otn/ Si)ec/ 9tet$t$unt/ tfrmutf;, 
 Valley, animal, thorn, tea, riches, poverty, 
 
 Semutf), 3ftat&e. 
 
 meekness, rod. 
 
 E 
 
38 EXERCISES ON 
 
 f, ff- 
 
 As in English : 
 
 gat)l, $aUt ge$l, geU, $of, ijoffcn, 
 
 Fallow, fall, case, fault, skin, court, (to) hope, 
 
 Wiaf, fdjlaff. 
 sleep, slack. 
 
 j (consonant). 
 
 Like the English consonant ?/ in yes, year : — 
 
 3a/ 3af)r, Semonb/ Sod)/ jung/ 3ube/ 
 
 Yes, year, somebody, yoke, young, Jew, 
 
 miungen. 
 
 to make young again. 
 
 1. ©, at the beginning of a word or syllable, hard, 
 like the English g in God, give. 
 
 2. At the end of a syllable, soft and guttural; but 
 after t, e, a, 6, u, et, eu, and an, or a liquid consonant, 
 more palatal, and similar to the English consonant y 
 in yes. This soft sound it also preserves : — 
 
 a. When followed by b or t, as SctQb. 
 
 b. In cases of elision, as trag't (trdget). 
 
 c. When the word is increased by inflexion : ZaQ, 
 
 Sage§ ; or when the original root-syllable of the 
 word has been increased by one or more letters 
 of formation, as : ^lag=C/ $tdg?er. 
 
 3. Preceded by n, the 3 has the hard initial sound, 
 both letters (the n and 9) melting moreover together 
 into a palatal nasal sound, similar to that of the English 
 letters n and g in sing. 
 
THE PRONUNCIATION. 39 
 
 1. ©emfe* gut, ©unjr, grof, ' ©ott, ©etji, 
 (A) chamois, good, favour, great, God, spirit, 
 
 ©atte, ©ute, ©au. 
 
 husband, goodness, district. 
 
 2. 20ig', bog, flug, enrig, fjettig, bttttg, gtttigr 
 Eye, bent, prudent, eternal, holy, cheap, wing., 
 
 MniQ, Subtcig, rcenig, 36g4tng, <5dug4ing, 3%cl. 
 
 king, Louis, little, pupil, baby, rein. 
 
 a. 3agb, $rebtgt, 
 Chase, sermon, maid-servant. 
 
 b. SSagt (for rcaget), fagt e lugt, 
 (He) dares, (he) says, (he) lies, 
 
 $6mg'6, £rieg'§. 
 
 of the king's, of the war. 
 
 e. 2Beg=e§, <Stegse3> £ag=e§, (Sorg^e, 
 
 Of the road, of the victory, of the day, care, 
 
 SSerforg-er. 
 provider. 
 
 So ©efang, Jtlang, ©ejtnnung, ©attung, ftngen, (ange. 
 Singing, sound, mind, species, (to) sing, long. 
 
 f,cf. 
 
 1. it and (f in general as in English; but when f is 
 preceded by n, both letters assume a palatal nasal sound, 
 similar to that of the same letters in English in thank, 
 think. 
 
 •2. $t is not mute before n, as in English. 
 
40 
 
 EXERCISES ON 
 
 1. ^icl/ £eil/ f&nncn/ £unfr/ Sinabe, $nk, ,£ned)t, 
 Keel, wedge, to be able, art, boy, knee, valet, 
 
 2£n!cr/ gin?/ finfcn, fcmferi/ banfen/ 
 
 anchor, finch, (to) sink, (they) sank, (to) thank, 
 
 9Socf, <Satf/ Sftficfen. 
 coat, sack, back. 
 
 2. .ftnatreri/ .Knappe/ .Knocfyen, £norpcl/ ^nittcl. 
 (to) rattle, esquire, bones, cartilage, cudgel. 
 
 j, Q, and I. 
 
 3&nner, ©onncr, tenner j jebc/ ©oetf)e, £6ber$ 
 
 January, patron, connoisseur ; every, Goethe, bait ; 
 
 »erictf)ren/ S&i)ren, feijren 5 
 
 (to) superannuate, (to) ferment, to sweep (turn) $ 
 
 3ube/ ©ute, ^ut) 5 ©unft, £unft$ ©ret§/ ^reig ,* 
 
 Jew, good ones, cow ; favour, art ; an old man, a circle ; 
 
 ©riedjert/ ^tiegerj ueriungen/ oergtngen; 
 
 Greeks, warriors ; to make young again, (they) passed away ; 
 
 fing, 
 
 Sin! 5 
 
 ftngt, 
 
 jTn!t 5 
 
 (he) caught, 
 
 finch; 
 
 (he) sings, 
 
 (he) sinks ; 
 
 ©gge/ 
 
 Gcfes 
 
 £>ogge/ 
 
 Sccfe; 
 
 (a) harrow, 
 
 (a) corner ; 
 
 (a) bull-dog, 
 
 dock-yard, 
 
 ©ram/ torn. 
 
 
 
 
 grief, mercery. 
 
 
 
 gn, ftu 
 
 ©nabe/ ^nabe 5 
 
 gnatrcn, 
 
 fnarren; 
 
 Grace, boy ; 
 
 (to) whine, 
 
 (to) creak 
 
 ©neif/ fnetpen. 
 
 
 
 a kind of granite, (to) pinch. 
 
 
 
THE PRONUNCIATION. 41 
 
 £ as in English. The double I (ft) sharpens the pre- 
 ceding vowel, as every double consonant does, and we 
 consequently pronounce SQBall, not wauhl as in English. 
 
 ®taty, ©tall 5 $Saty, SBallj 
 
 W> 
 
 Sail 5 
 
 Steel, stable; choice, rampart; 
 
 fallow, 
 
 fall, case; 
 
 ©all, tfnall, £alle. 
 
 
 
 ball, clap, report, hall. 
 
 
 
 
 p; m>, p&, pf, pf. 
 
 1. $) and pp, as in English. 
 
 2. $&, like f. 
 
 3. $Pf, as it is written, each letter distinctly articu- 
 lated : sp^erl*. 
 
 4- ?)f/ — also in this combination each letter is dis- 
 tinctly sounded. 
 
 1. $>abffc/ spelj; ^nnj, £nappe; 5)uppe, Stpper ^appe« 
 Pope, fur, prince, esquire, puppet, lip,, cap, 
 
 2. $l)iltpp, tyfyantafie, SJtybnfo Wlofopfr 2tbolpl). 
 Philip, fancy, Phoenix, philosopher, Adolphus. 
 
 3. $ferb, spfcmb; ^feffer, ^feil, Sampf, (Stopfer. 
 Horse, pledge, pepper, dart, steam. creator. 
 
 4. ^falnr, 3>fi)d&e, spfeubo. 
 Psalm, Psyche, pseudo. 
 
 gefylen; cmpfe^len 5 ftnben; cmpfinben; 
 
 (To) fail, miss, (to) recommend; (to) find, (to) feel; 
 
 fatjrt/ $)fei:b j fing/ empftng 5 
 
 (he) drives, horse ; (he) caught, (he) received ; 
 
 e3 
 
4*2 EXERCISES ON 
 
 fanb/ *Pfanb$ Sunt, spfunb j 
 
 (he) found, pledge ; a thing found, pound ; 
 
 geile/ $Pfeile 5 $>falm/ ©alms. 
 
 file, darts, arrows; psalm, Salms. 
 
 The q is always found united with the vowel u, in 
 unison with which it is pronounced kv, or rather fn? ; 
 but by no means so full and round as the English qu. 
 
 Slual/ qualeit/ 
 
 SXualm/ 
 
 £tucUe, 
 
 quetfdjeii/ 
 
 Torment, (to) torment, 
 
 vapour, 
 
 source, 
 
 (to) squeeze, 
 
 ttuttte, Slufrl. 
 
 
 
 
 quince, a twirling stick. 
 
 
 
 
 r, tr. 
 
 The r is pronounced with greater force and shrillness 
 than in English. English students must be mindful 
 not to alter the sound of the vowels preceding or follow- 
 ing the r* The double r (tr) requires a double force 
 and shrillness. 
 
 Stab/ SRebe, 9tetd), rot)/ 
 
 Stidfoter/ SRofe, SRuftn/ 
 
 Wheel, speech, empire, raw, 
 
 judge, rose, fame, 
 
 rufyren/ 9t5fyre/ 
 
 SRo^t/ 
 
 «^)err/ tjerrltcf)/ 
 
 (to) touch, (a) pipe, 
 
 reed, 
 
 sir, master, excellent, 
 
 fyertfcfyen, Stttyum/ 
 
 Uf)r, 
 
 £tyr, ©efdjirr, «Karr/ 
 
 (to) reign, error, 
 
 watch, 
 
 ear, vessel, fool, 
 
 roerbe, ttrirb/ rcurbe, 
 
 rourbe/ 
 
 rcarb. 
 
 be, becomes, was, 
 
 should, 
 
 became. 
 
THE PRONUNCIATION. 43 
 
 f, 6, % ff, ft, (*, ft, ft). 
 
 1. The long f at the beginning, or in the middle of a 
 word, mild and soft, like the English s in rose; the final 
 6/ somewhat sharper. 
 
 2. The £ is only used after a long vowel, and ex- 
 presses a sharp hissing sound after a long "vowel. Its 
 true sound is that of a pure sharp f, without any admix- 
 ture of the sound of $♦ 
 
 3. The jf is perfectly like the English double s 9 and 
 only to be used after a sharp vowel. 
 
 4. The fc, before a, 0, u, or a consonant, like sk : 
 before d, e, i, 6, U, ett, like s-tz. 
 
 5. The fd), like the English sh, 
 
 6. The ft: and fp, as in English in sfott<?, spy ; each of 
 the two letters being distinctly pronounced. 
 
 1. &aa\, ©eele, @&ule/ fudjen/ Stofe, SKafe/ SBetfe, 
 Saloon, soul, pillar, (to) seek, rose, nose, manner, 
 
 fdufelm $au$, £aufer, ©lag/ ©lafer/ . SftauS, 5Jt&u[e, 
 
 (to) whistle, house, houses, glass, glasses, mouse, mice, 
 
 8oo3, Soofe. 
 lot, tickets. 
 
 2. SKaf/ s^, $ n $, g u £ e g, ©rufc 
 Measure, measures, foot, of the foot greeting 
 
 ©ru£e, ©eifel, 9ftei£et. 
 
 greetings, scourge, chisel. 
 
 3. tfeimtntfiV £enntmflW £tnfcermJT, £tnberntfte/ 
 Knowledge, knowledge, erudition, obstacle, obstacles> 
 
 <3d)toff, @d)l6|Ter. 
 castle, castles. 
 
44 EXERCISES ON 
 
 4. (Sclaoe, (Sclaoonien/ (Scorpion 5 (SctptO/ (Scepter, (Scaoola. 
 Slave, Slavonia, scorpion ; Scipio, scepter, Scevola. 
 
 5. <Sdi6nf)eit, <Sd>etn/ (Sd)auer, SDcarfd), forfdfoen, 
 Beauty, appearance, shower, march, (to) search, 
 
 Sifdjeri/ wtfdjen/ gtfd>fd)uppen/ gleifdjsjcfyranf/ gtafd)=d)en, 
 (to) hiss, (to) wipe, fish scales, larder, a small bottle, 
 
 £tfdjsd)en. 
 a little table. 
 
 6. (Starr (not shtarr), (Stcii-fe, (Sttmme, ©eifi (no* gisht), 
 Numb, strength, voice, spirit, 
 
 Sufi/ Safl/ (Sprad)e (rco* shprache), fpringen, (Sptet/ 
 
 pleasure, burden, language, (to) leap, game, 
 
 (Spur/ fpret§en. 
 trace, to open widely. 
 
 The sound of the t>, as an initial, is perfectly like that 
 of the f» Some pronounce it in the middle of a word 
 with a soft sound, approaching that of the &♦ 
 
 SSzit, »olt/ wor/ wx, Stater, 33oUmad)t, collenben, 
 
 Guy, full, before, four, father, plenipotence, (to) achieve, 
 
 un=oergefstid), greoel/ |3utoer/ SJcafoe, Sasa, (Sclaoe. 
 
 ever-memorable, outrage, powder, mallows, lava, slave. 
 
 The sound of the \v is perfectly represented by that of 
 the French or Italian v. The sound of the English v 9 
 when divested of its admixture of f; or that of the ic, 
 without its characteristic fullness and roundness, will 
 come very near to it. 
 
THE PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 45 
 
 SBaffer/ SBort, rcett, SBttte/ rcirren, erotg, 
 
 Water, word, far, will, (to) entangle, eternal, 
 
 etxoat, fd)tt>ar$, f^rcetgen, 3roang, arret/ 5 rotfd)en, 
 
 something, black, (to be) silent, constraint, two, between, 
 
 gome/ SBtttwe. 
 
 lion, widow. 
 
 Sett, 
 
 wett$ 
 
 
 Sol!, 
 
 SBolfe, 
 
 S5ater, 
 
 roaten ; 
 
 Guy, 
 
 far; 
 
 
 people, 
 
 cloud, 
 
 father, 
 
 (to) wade 
 
 tier, »tr 5 
 
 »0ll/ 
 
 SSSolte; 
 
 con, 
 
 Sffionne. 
 
 
 four, we ; 
 
 full, 
 
 wool ; 
 
 from, 
 
 delight. 
 
 
 fc. 
 
 
 The J is pronounced like fo. The t ought to be particu- 
 larly marked. % sounds like t-ts. 
 
 Sart, 3ange, 
 
 Tender, tongs, 
 Soil, statfer, 
 
 an inch, toll, sugar, 
 ^er^ucEen. 
 
 palpitation of the heart, 
 ©djufc, Sru§, $1% 
 
 protection, scorn, attire, 
 $pu§sjimmer. 
 dressing-room. 
 
 3unge, £ett, 3euge, timber, 
 
 tongue, time, witness, tinder, 
 
 (Sets, $reug, 3tot 5 , ^erj, £ol§, 
 
 avarice, cross, charm, heart, wood, 
 
 San^tmmet, $a§e, 2Bt$, 
 
 , ball-room, cat, wit, 
 
 fe^en, 
 
 (to) sit, place, 
 
 (to) delight, 
 
47 
 
 CHAPTER V: 
 
 THE FORMATION OF WORDS, 
 
 The system of the accentuation of the German lan- 
 guage being entirely based on the logical structure of 
 the words, a satisfactory explanation of the former can- 
 not be given without a previous illustration of the prin- 
 ciples of the latter. 
 
 All German words are : 
 
 a. Either root- words, 
 
 b. Or derivatives. 
 They are moreover either simple or compound. 
 
 I. 
 
 Root-words. 
 
 By root-words we understand, in the present state of 
 the language, words of which no derivation from other 
 words can be traced, as: bind, groio,Jlee,Jind. 
 
 All roots are considered to be of a monosyllabic form, 
 
 II. 
 
 Derivatives. 
 Derivatives are words formed from roots. 
 They are either: — 
 
 a. Primary forms (Stdmme), that is, words derived 
 from roots by means of a change of the radical 
 
48 FORMATION OF WORDS. 
 
 vowel, as : bound (bond), derived from bind, ; 
 great, derived from grow ; flight, derived from 
 flee ; found, derived from find ; or — 
 b. Secondary forms (©projjformen), i. e. words derived 
 from primary forms, by adding some new sylla- 
 bles to the radical word, as : bond-age, from 
 bond ; great-ness, from great ; found-ling, from 
 found. 
 
 ]. — The Primary Forms. 
 
 The words of this form are all substantives and adjec- 
 tives. We distinguish two forms of them : namely — 
 
 a. The ancient form (2tblaut§form). Words of this 
 
 form are produced by a change of the vowel of 
 the root, and have no added termination : as, 
 $Ivlq, flight, from ftiegsen, to fly ;'* ©prud)/ sentence, 
 from fpredjsen, to speak ; fdjnttt, cut, from fd)netb=en, 
 to cut ; frf)6n/ beautiful, from fdjetn^en/ to shine. 
 
 Some, however, do not change the vowel ; as : 
 gait/ fall, from fatten; gang/ fang, from fangen 5 
 @d)tag/ blow, from fd)lagen. 
 
 b. The middle form (SDHttel form). The substantives 
 
 and adjectives of the middle form are also pro- 
 duced by a change of the radical vowel, but are 
 
 * The infinitive, representing the notion which the verb conveys, in the 
 most simple, general, and unmodified sense, it seems but natural that it 
 should be considered as the ground or radical form of the verb. 
 
 But all German verbs having assumed the termination en in the infi- 
 nitive, and roots being only admitted to exist in a monosyllabic form, 
 that substance of the word only which remains when the syllable en has 
 been substracted, is considered as the root of the verb- For instance: 
 the infinitive of the verb to find, is ftnb-en $ but only the syllable ftnb is 
 considered as the root of the word. 
 
 Some grammarians admit the imperfect tense as that part of a primi- 
 tive verb in which the root is contained, for its being always found in a 
 monosyllabic form, as: geben (to give); imperfect tense, (id)) gab (I gave). 
 
FORMATION OF WORDS. 49 
 
 distinguished from those of the ancient form by 
 having assumed one of the terminations el/ en, 
 er, fte, or one of the letters t, ft/ tv e, which, 
 moreover, are so closely connected with the 
 radical syllable of the word, that the latter, 
 when divested of them, no longer conveys 
 any sense or meaning : as, ©if»t/ ©ruf=t/ $unsft/ 
 SSat-er/ ©art=en/ in all of which the radical 
 syllables ©if/ ©ruf/ «fturv f8at f ©art/ are unmean- 
 ing and empty sounds. The syllable fath of 
 father, and gard of garden, in English, will 
 afford an illustration. 
 
 2. — Secondary Derivatives (©projjformen). 
 
 The words produced by this form are substantives, 
 adjectives, verbs, and adverbs. 
 
 Secondary derivatives are formed from primary deri- 
 vatives, or roots, by means of affixes (prefixes and suffixes), 
 that is : syllables of derivation, as : e, el, en, et, aty, nt(3, 
 &c, viz.: ©cfyloff-et,* locksmith, from <Sd)loJT ; mdd}t't$, 
 mighty, from ^Ra&)t ; SStmt^mff, alliance, from 35unfc, 
 
 * The characteristic difference between those words of the primary 
 middle form, which assume the terminations el/ eri/ iV f &c, and those of the 
 secondary derivatives which take the same terminations, is this : that the 
 radical words or syllables of the latter convey an independent and perfect 
 meaning by themselves, so that they may be divested of their prefixes or 
 suffixes without losing their fundamental signification. Further, that the 
 syllables of derivation (prefixes and suffixes) added to them, do not, as is 
 the case with words of the middle form, complete, but modify the meaning 
 of the radical word or syllable. For instance, the syllable er in the word 
 SSotser/ of the middle form, is so united with the radical syllable %$at, 
 that the latter by itself has no meaning at all, whilst moreover the notion 
 which the word SSater conveys is a perfect simple and unmodified notion. 
 But the syllable trinf / in the secondary derivative £rinf=er/ conveys a 
 perfect notion by itself, namely, that of drinking, and the syllable er added 
 to it, does not complete, but modify this notion ; for the word Srinf Zt 
 implies a person addicted to drinking. 
 F 
 
50 FORMATION OF WORDS. 
 
 Affixes are either primitively signs of derivation, as : 
 C, en, cr, tg, t|t, &c, or they were originally notional 
 words, which now have assumed the signification of 
 affixes, as : fdjaft, the English ship in friendship ; tfyum, 
 the English dom in kingdom. 
 
 From secondary derivatives a third class of derivatives 
 is formed, by means of adding another affix to a 
 secondary derivative, as : banf-bar, &anf barf ett, grateful, 
 grateful-ness ; gefcfytcfltd), ©efd)tc!4td)'f ett, able, ability. 
 
 But formations of this kind are confined within 
 certain limits, beyond which they are considered as 
 spurious forms. 
 
 The vowels a, 0, U, are generally modified in secondary 
 derivatives, as : SButger, citizen, from S3urg ; mdcbttg, 
 mighty, from Sftfocfyt ; ftdnfifd), quarrelsome, from ganh 
 
 The affixes (prefixes and suffixes), by means of which 
 secondary derivatives are formed, are : — 
 
 1. — Prefixes. 
 
 be as : — S5esrtd)t/ report. 
 
 cnt „ cnfcfpringen/ to originate. 
 
 ant „ 2Cnts»ort/ answer. 
 
 e m p „ (gmp^fang; reception. 
 
 cr „ er4t)eUen/ to confer. 
 
 e i? i „ (Stengel/ arch-angel. 
 
 g e ,, ge^angen/ to attain, to come at, or to. 
 
 mtfj „ mifMaUcR' to displease. 
 
 u n „ Un=menfd)/ cruel man, barbarian. 
 
 u t „ Ur=fadh, cause, reason. 
 
 r> e t „ 33er?tracj, treaty, contract. 
 
 5 e r „ 3er=jt6rcn/ to destroy. 
 
FORMATION OF WORDS. 
 
 51 
 
 
 2. — Suffixes. 
 
 
 e as- 
 
 -SSurg^e/ bail, surety. 
 
 letn 
 
 as — $rau4etn/ miss, 
 
 en „ 
 
 ©tab^en/ ditch. 
 
 
 lady. 
 
 el „ 
 
 ©tassel/ sting. 
 
 ltd) 
 
 „ QlM4i$, happy. 
 
 er >, 
 
 bttt=cr/ bitter. 
 
 ling 
 
 „ Sung4ing/ youth. 
 
 anb „ 
 
 4?ett-anb/ saviour. 
 
 ner 
 
 „ 3fab=ner, orator. 
 
 at$ „ 
 
 Jgtimzaty, home, na- 
 
 ntf 
 
 „ gtnjtersntf^ dark- 
 
 
 tive country. 
 
 
 ness. 
 
 at „ 
 
 $Roxi*at, month. 
 
 xi&) 
 
 „ Btynstifyt ensign. 
 
 bar „ 
 
 nmnbersbar, won- 
 
 fol 
 
 „ ©d&tcfsfal/ fate. 
 
 
 derful. 
 
 f am 
 
 „ fotgsfani/ obedient. 
 
 d)cn „ 
 
 Sftannsdjen/ little 
 
 f^aft 
 
 „ SSotsfd&aft/ message. 
 
 
 man, mannikin. 
 
 fel 
 
 „ SRatHel/ riddel. 
 
 be „ 
 
 greu=be, joy. 
 
 tfyum 
 
 „ 2Clter4f)um, anti- 
 
 et „ 
 
 £eud}el=et, hypo- 
 
 
 quity. 
 
 
 crisy. 
 
 ung 
 
 ,, S£arn=ung, warning, 
 
 ern „ 
 
 f)5la=ern, wooden. 
 
 
 caution. 
 
 *aft„ 
 
 gtaub^aft/ credible. 
 
 ytf) 
 
 ,, 2Crm=utf), poverty. 
 
 t)Ctt „ 
 
 SBa^ett/ truth. 
 
 St 9 
 
 „ mersjtg/ forty. 
 
 id) „ 
 
 SSottstd)/ coop, tub. 
 
 eln 
 
 „ ?rdnl=eln/ to be 
 
 iti)t „ 
 
 ^el)r4d)t/ sweep- 
 
 
 sickly. 
 
 
 ings. 
 
 igen 
 
 „ mn=igen, to clean. 
 
 i9 » 
 
 fletfMg> diligent. 
 
 t e n 
 
 „ t)en=len/ to hang 
 
 inn „ 
 
 gurjtsinn/ princess. 
 
 f d)cn 
 
 „ fyetrsfdjen, to reign 
 
 ing „ 
 
 @bel=ing^ nobleman. 
 
 Sen 
 
 „ dd)sjen/ to groan 
 
 if* „ 
 
 Itnbsifd)/ childish. 
 
 engen 
 
 ,, faul=en§en/ to lounge, 
 
 f ett „ 
 
 jQdUvddt, cheer- 
 
 
 to be idle. 
 
 
 fulness. 
 
 iren 
 
 ,, fdf)att4cen/ to sha- 
 
 lei „ 
 
 etner=tetj one and 
 the same, all one. 
 
 
 dow. 
 
 By means of these rules, and a due acquaintance with 
 the syllables of derivation, especially the prefixes and 
 suffixes enumerated above, it will be easy for the student 
 
02 FORMATION OF WORDS. 
 
 to discern the root of a word ; for (in words not increased 
 by grammatical inflection) that syllable which is neither 
 a prefix nor a suffix, nor a syllable of formation of the 
 middle form, must be the root. 
 
 Thus, in words formed by prefixes, the second syllable 
 
 root root 
 
 will be the root, as: er^ttjeufen, to confer; SSer-trag, 
 
 root 
 
 treaty ; Ur^f ad), cause. 
 
 In words formed by suffixes, the root will be contained 
 
 root root 
 
 in the first syllable, as : glttcMtd), happy ; £eiter4 eit, 
 cheerfulness ; SBafyr-fyett, truth. 
 
 In words formed both by prefixes and suffixes, the 
 
 root 
 
 root must be in the middle ; as : Cn^gtefy-tmg, education ; 
 SSe^ttub^nip, affliction. 
 
 III. 
 
 Compounds. 
 
 Composition (3ufammenfe&tmg), is the union or com- 
 bination of two or more words into one unity of notion, 
 as : ZpfzUmin, apple-wine (cider), <£>anb'fd)U, hand-shoe 
 (glove), convey the same notions which are expressed by 
 the corresponding simple words in English. 
 
 Every compound, whatever may be the number of 
 words it contains, is considered as consisting only of two 
 components, one of which is determined by the other. 
 That part or word which contains the fundamental notion 
 of the compound, is called the fundamental word, or 
 determined component; the other part or word which 
 modifies or determines the former, is distinguished by 
 the name of the determinative component. Hence, in 
 
FORMATION OF WORDS. 53 
 
 the word SRatf^fyauS, town-house, the word ^atl§ is the fun- 
 damental word, and fftaty the determinative component. 
 
 1. The determinative component ought always to 
 precede the fundamental word, except in compound 
 particles, in which this order is generally inverted. 
 
 From a transposition of the component parts results 
 either an entire change of the original meaning, or no 
 sense at all ; as :— 
 
 £)eW>aum/ olive-tree ; SSaumol/ olive-oil. 
 
 9toti)4aug/ townhouse ; 4?au§rat§/ household furniture. 
 
 ©djret&sftu&e/ office; @tubefdjret&/ which means nothing at all. 
 
 2. From one and the same fundamental word various 
 compounds may be formed, as, from *£mu3 1 — 
 
 SftatfyfyauSt town-hall. 
 ©arten^auS, summer-house. 
 %ttys§QX&i pawnbroking establishment. 
 2Crmen4)au§/ poor-house. 
 2Bof)n=t)au3/ dwelling-house. 
 S&ixfyfcfyauSt public-house, tavern. 
 
 3. And again, the determinative component of one 
 compound may constitute the fundamental word of 
 another ; thus the words : Slaty and ©atten, of the com- 
 pounds 9ktf)f)att$, ©artenfyauS, may be considered as 
 fundamental words, and the following compounds formed 
 from them : — 
 
 (S5efyeimer=rati)/ a privy counsellor. 
 (Stabkrattv senate of the town. 
 jQofaatf), counsellor of the court. 
 Sujt-garten/ a pleasure-garden. 
 £>bjt=garten/ an orchard, fruit-garden. 
 23aum=garten/ an orchard. 
 ©emufe=gar-ten/ a kitchen-garden. 
 f 3 
 
54 FORMATION OF WORDS, 
 
 Multi- Compounds. 
 
 One compound may also be again the component part 
 of another compound, as : ©djumacfyer^jfrafje, shoemaker 
 street; (§artcnf)au$-tl)ur, summerhouse door. Or even 
 both component parts may be compounds, as : 9lorbfee- 
 fcfytfffafyrt, the navigation of the North Sea; Sanbfee-fcfyifffafyrt, 
 lake-navigation. 
 
 Or one or both components may be double compounds, 
 as : £anbfeefd)tfffabrt3Futtbe, the art of lake navigation. 
 
 The division of multi-compounds into their two com- 
 ponent parts requires a perfect acquaintance with the 
 meaning of the different words of which the compound 
 is formed. 
 
 In general the words are joined together in com- 
 pounds without undergoing any alteration in their 
 terminations ; but in some cases, the determinative com- 
 ponent, if a substantive, assumes one of the terminations 
 e, er, el, en, e6 (§), as : &ag-e~bucfy, daybook ; ^etb-el- 
 beere, bilberry, instead of Sag^bud), ^etb-beere* 
 
 When words are joined which stand in a grammatical 
 relation to each other, such a combination is called a 
 composition by contraction, and in this case the determi- 
 native component always assumes the grammatical in- 
 flexion, corresponding to its grammatical relation, as : 
 Qtyrtjfcen-fetnb, a hater or persecutor of the Christians ; 
 Pallet- rt-flolg, a clownish pride. 
 
 In some of these compounds, the determinative com- 
 ponent is even separately declined, as : — 
 
 N. bet ©etyeimesratfy, the privy counsellor. 
 
 G. beg ©efyetm=en=ratt)e§, of the privy counsellor. 
 
 D, bem ©efyetmsertsratfye/ to the privy counsellor. 
 
FORMATION OF WORDS. 55 
 
 Words of all descriptions are joined together to form 
 compounds, as: — 
 
 Substantives are formed by joining a substantive, or 
 an adjective, or a verb, or a particle, to a substan- 
 tive. 
 
 Adjectives, by joining an adjective or substantive to 
 an adjective. 
 
 Verbs, by joining a substantive, adverb, or preposition, 
 to a verb. 
 
 Adverbs and conjunctions, by joining adverbs, prepo- 
 sitions, and even substantives, to adverbs, con- 
 junctions and prepositions. 
 
 IV. 
 
 The Grammatical Inflections. 
 
 The position of the root being necessarily affected by 
 any material change of the original structure of the 
 words, we cannot conclude this chapter without bestowing 
 also a few considerations on those changes of the termi- 
 nations of the words, by means of which the latter are 
 qualified to express the different relations in which they 
 may stand to each other in a sentence, and which are 
 termed the grammatical inflections. 
 
 The syllables of grammatical inflexion are : e, em, en, 
 enb, en$, er, em, eS, eft, et, te, jte, 
 
 1 . By means of the syllables e3, e, em, er, em, ett3, the 
 cases of the declensions of substantives, adjectives, and 
 pronouns are formed, as : — 
 
56 
 
 FORMATION OF WORDS. 
 
 SUBSTANTIVES. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Nom. bag £auS/ the house. 
 Gen. beS %aufe$, of the house. 
 Dat. tern #au(=e/ to the house. 
 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 
 
 Nom. 
 
 tie #&uf=er/ the houses. 
 
 
 
 Dat. 
 
 ben £ctufserm to the houses. 
 
 
 
 
 ADJECTIVES. 
 
 
 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 
 
 Nom. 
 
 gutter/ 
 
 flute, 
 
 guteS, 
 
 
 good. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 gutseS/ 
 
 gutter, 
 
 guteS, 
 
 
 of the good 
 
 Dat. 
 
 gukem, 
 
 gut=er, 
 
 QuUzm, 
 
 
 to the good. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 guken, 
 
 gufce, 
 
 gut=e§/ 
 
 
 the good. 
 
 
 
 PRONOUNS. 
 
 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Nom 
 
 mein/ my. 
 
 
 Nom. 
 
 metn=e 
 
 ,my. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 memoes, of my. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 metn=er, of my. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 metnscm/ to 
 
 my. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 metn^en/ to my. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 metnseti/ my 
 
 
 Ace. 
 
 mettle 
 
 , my. 
 
 2. The syllables er, eft, serve to form the degrees 
 of comparison, as : §x$$, great; grower, greater; gro^-eff, 
 or grojt, greatest. 
 
 3. By means of the syllables en, enfc), eft, it, te, the 
 different moods, tenses, and persons of the verbs are 
 formed, as : — 
 
FORMATION OF WORDS. 57 
 
 By means of c ti/ the infinitive and the first 
 and third persons of the 
 present plural, as : . . lte&=eti/ to love. 
 (xc\x) tieb-cn/ we love. 
 „ „ e n hi the present participle . . Xizbztxti, loving. 
 „ „ z, the imperative and present 
 singular of the subjunc- 
 tive lteb=C/ love. 
 
 (baj* id)) lizb'ti that Hove. 
 „ „ e ft/ the second person of the 
 
 present singular . . . lteb=ejt, lovest. 
 „ „ e t, the third person .... tfe&=et, loves. 
 „ „ t e/ the first and third person 
 
 of the imperfect . . . ite&ste/ Zovec?. 
 
 Examples of the Position of the Root in Words 
 increased both by syllables of derivation and 
 Grammatical Inflection. 
 
 1. Words formed by Prefixes. 
 
 prefix root prefix root prefix root 
 
 Skr^ttag, contract; ©e-fafyr, danger; Un^mettfci), bar- 
 barian. 
 
 The same increased by grammatical inflection — 
 
 gram. gram, 
 
 prefix root infl. prefix root infl. 
 
 SSer^trag^eS, of the contract; ©e-faf)r-en, dangers; 
 
 gram, 
 prefix root infl. 
 
 Un-menfd^en, barbarians. 
 
58 FORMATION OF WORDS. 
 
 2. Words formed by Suffixes. 
 
 root suffix root suffix root suffix 
 
 SReit-er, horseman; SGBafyt^eit, truth; gurjiMnn, 
 The same increased by grammatical inflection — 
 
 root suffix infl. root suffix infl. 
 
 $iz\UiXz§, of the horseman; SBafyr^ettsen, truths; 
 
 root suffix infl. 
 
 gutjVtnn-en, princesses. 
 
 3. Words formed both by Prefixes and Suffixes. 
 
 prefix root suffix prefix root suffix prefix 
 
 ©e^roofyn^ett, fyzfoY; un^menfd^tid), barbarous; t>or^ 
 
 root suffix 
 
 ficfy-ttg, cautious. 
 
 The same increased by grammatical inflection- 
 prefix root suffix infl. prefix root suffix infl. 
 
 ©e^roofyn^eiteen, habits; un^menfd^lid^er, wore bar- 
 
 infl. of infl. of 
 prefix root suffix gender comp. 
 
 barous; (em) DOfcsftcfyfc igs er- cr (Sttann), a more prudent 
 man. 
 
59 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 ACCENTUATION. 
 
 Accentuation, founded upon the value of words in the 
 sentence, and of syllables in each word, says the learned 
 Dr. Becker, in his valuable grammar, is more uniformly 
 observed and more strictly attended to in the German 
 than in any other modern language. The German lan- 
 guage, moreover, requires a stronger and more decided 
 accentuation, by means of a rise, fall, and varied impetus 
 of the voice, than that which is admitted by other lan- 
 guages. Foreigners, therefore, in order to speak German 
 correctly, have not only to arrive at an accurate discrimi- 
 nation of the syllables and words which require to be 
 accentuated from those which do not, but also to appro- 
 priate to themselves the peculiar energy of German 
 accentuation.* 
 
 * The accentuation of the German language is strictly logical, the 
 chief accent being always placed upon the most important word in a 
 sentence, and on the most important syllable (the root- syllable) of a 
 word ; whilst all syllables of derivation and inflexion have either only a 
 weak tone, or are entirely unaccented. 
 
 These truly rational principles of accentuation exercise a most favour- 
 able influence on the language in general ; for, in the first place, it is 
 obvious, that the emphatical distinction of the most important words and 
 syllables must in a high degree promote; the perspicuity of speech, the 
 mind of the hearer being immediately and forcibly directed to the chief 
 notions of the sentence. 
 
 In the next place, it is not less evident, that the same marked distinc- 
 
60 ACCENTUATION. 
 
 We distinguish : — 
 
 1. The accentuation of syllables, 
 
 2. The accentuation of words, and 
 
 3. The oratory accent. 
 
 I. 
 THE ACCENTUATION OF SYLLABLES. 
 
 The syllables of a word are distinguished by a different 
 degree of intensity of tone or elevation of the voice, 
 partly in order to point out their relative grammatical 
 and logical importance, partly to please the ear by a 
 musical variety of tone. 
 
 Thus, a syllable is either pronounced : — 
 
 a. With a strong elevation or stress of the voice, 
 
 which is called the full or principal accent, an 
 will be represented thus (a). 
 
 b. Or with an inferior stress, which is termed the 
 
 demi accent, and will be marked thus ( * ). 
 
 tion of the first or radical syllables of the words will not only produce a 
 great number of Trochees (a eurythmical combination, which is con- 
 sidered the most perfect), but also promote a eurythmical proportion of 
 accented and unaccented syllables in general. 
 
 Finally, the principle of leaving the soundless syllables of derivation 
 and inflection entirely unaccented, and even prescribing an accelerated 
 articulation of them, proves equally favourable to euphony, as the full 
 sounding vowels of the notional words are thus brought nearer to each 
 other, and by that means a rich variety of high sounding notes is taking 
 effect within a reduced period of time. 
 
ACCENTUATION. 61 
 
 c. Or with no stress at all ; in which case the syllables 
 are said to be unaccentuated. The repre- 
 sentative sign of unaccented syllables will be 
 this (.). 
 
 1. — Accentuation of the Syllables in Simple 
 (not compounded) Words. 
 
 A. — The Principal, or Full Accent (*) : 
 
 Rests in all uncompounded words of two or more 
 syllables, upon the radical syllable* which, except in 
 derivatives formed by prefixes, is always the first syllable, 
 
 as : g r e u fce joy, 33 a Uz x father, f r e u n Mid) friendly, 
 
 Spzitt Xzhit cheerfulness. 
 
 Thus we accent: Qtbztt do but give (the imperative of 
 
 the verb geb^en) ; but %i^o it prayer (substantive), derived 
 
 from be teen, to pray. 
 
 Exceptions. 
 
 1. The word lebenbtg, although derived from leb-ert, 
 
 takes the accent upon the syllable of derivation, 
 
 as: leb^entog* 
 
 2. All words ending in ei have the full accent on the 
 
 last syllable ei, as : (Bpklmi sport, 9ftetetei farm, 
 iUnberei childishness. 
 
 3. All German words with the foreign termination 
 
 irett, have the full accent on the syllable tten, as: 
 
 * It is to be remarked, that, for the purposes of accentuation, the 
 division of the syllables is to be effected, not according to the rules of 
 spelling, but according to the principles of the formation of words. 
 G 
 
62 ACCENTUATION. 
 
 fyaufaxtn to go peddling, fyalb-tren to halve, gratul- 
 
 tren to congratulate. 
 
 4. Words with the prefixes un, ut, mt£, crj, and ant, 
 have the full accent on these prefixes, not on the 
 
 radical syllables of the word, as : U r-fad? cause, 
 Ur^fprung origin, lixxUxooxt answer, Utt^jtnn non- 
 sense, fOHf^trauett distrust, dr^t)ater patriarch. 
 
 Obs. — In a few particular instances, the first four 
 prefixes take only the demi-accent. See 
 rules on the demi-accent. 
 
 B. — The Subordinate, or Demi Accent ( • ) rests : 
 
 1. On all suffixes the vowel of which is not e, viz. : am, 
 
 anb, at\), at, bat, bar, fyaft, fyett, ifyt, inn, hit, let, lein, 
 lid), ling, ling§, nip, fal, fam, fcfyaft, tfyum, una,, as : 
 £etl-anb saviour, Qzibzam son-in-law, Sztimzatfy 
 home, sfilonzat month, nmnber^bar wonderful. 
 
 2. On the prefix un : 
 
 a. Before participles, as : un^$erdd)t unrevenged, 
 
 un-Belol)nt unrewarded. 
 
 b. Before adjectives ending in bar, ltd), fam, 
 
 which are formed from verbs, as: un^enbltd) 
 
 infinitely, un^bulbfam intolerant, un^flerbltd) 
 immortal. 
 
 But before substantives and adverbs, and 
 before adjectives which are not derived from 
 verbs, u n has always the full accent, as : 
 
ACCENTUATION, 63 
 
 Un4tnn nonsense, Uxx^oXl accident, un-fd)ult>ig 
 innocent, utt^glucfUd^ unhappy. 
 
 Thus, even the adjectives un^txmfbar un- 
 grateful, and un^ftcfytbat invisible, although 
 ending^ in bat, have the full accent on the 
 prefix utt, because they are not in a direct 
 way derived from verbs, but from the sub- 
 stantives £)anf, ©icfyt 
 
 3. On the prefix ur, in the words ur^fprimglid) origi- 
 
 nally, and UV-plo^Ud) all on a sudden. 
 
 In all other compositions u r has the full accent. 
 
 4. On the prefix mi$, when inseparable before verbs, 
 
 as: mifsf alien displease, mi jMingen to fail. 
 
 When separable before verbs, as well as before 
 substantives and adjectives, m i jj has the full accent, 
 
 as: fc>a3 SDHjHrauen the distrust, t>a6 SDfci (^fatten 
 
 the displeasure, mtjMrautfrf) distrustful, mijjkfdlli*} 
 displeasing. 
 
 5. On the prefix (grj, as: (Sr^bieb aw «mz7tf #h'e£ 
 
 ^rg'fdmmerer arch-chamberlain, er^bofe very bad, 
 erg-bumm extremely stupid. 
 
 But Qtx% has the full accent in : dr^ttater 
 patriarch, (tr^engel archangel, (trjsbtftyof arcA- 
 bishop, (§r J-ftift archbishoprick. 
 
 C. — Unaccented («) are: — 
 1. All syllables of grammatical inflection (of declen- 
 sion, conjugation, and comparison) : viz. e, em, 
 
64 ACCENTUATION. 
 
 en, enb, en3, er, cm, eS, eft, et, te, and fie, as : 
 S5aum^e trees, bief^em to this, guteen to the good, 
 iteb-enb loving, ^erj-enS of the heart, ^tnb^er 
 children, ttmnb^ern to iconder, &c. 
 
 2. The "prefixes, the vowel of which is c : viz. be, 9 e, 
 
 ent, er, tier, jer, em)), as: blzxvfyxin to touch, 
 9 i^braucfyen fo wse, (tntefcfytug resolution, er^dfyten 
 to relate, jcr^bred^cn fo 6raz£, cm^ftnbcn fo/^7. 
 
 3. The suffixes, the vowel of which is e, viz. : d)en, be, 
 
 e, el, eln, en, tx(^, er, em, tel, fel, tyt, as : SSdum^ 
 
 d)en a ft#fe free, greub^e joy, £eb^el a lever, 
 fcfymetd^etn #0 flatter, fyofysern wooden, 0ldt^fel 
 nVWfe, 33tu4f)e blossom. 
 
 4. The suffixes tg, §ig, and fjiig, as: artel 9 genteel, 
 
 WtzftiQ forty, brefcfHg thirty. 
 
 Obs.< — Unaccentuated syllables accumulating in a 
 word, are to be uttered rapidly, as : £)te 
 
 rapidly rapidly rapidly 
 
 @erettset=en flfrtyUeUm ftd) in ba§ an fto^=enb=e 
 #auS, £Aose w^o were saved took refuge in 
 the adjoining house. 
 
 2. — The Accentuation of the Syllables in 
 Compound Words. 
 
 A. — The Full Accent (*) rests — 
 In compound words on the modifying word,* which in 
 
 * On its root-syllable, if the word is accompanied by a syllable of 
 derivation or inflection. 
 
ACCENTUATION. 65 
 
 substantives, adjectives, and verbs, generally precedes, 
 and in particles follows the fundamental word, as : 
 
 Substantives: JUrcfy^of churchyard, ©cfylofj^tfyurm 
 
 castle-tower, §enftet-<jla§ window-glass, ©laS- 
 fenjler glass-window. 
 
 Adjectives: gtQJjkmfitfytg generous, fyimmtUblau sky 
 
 blue, g r a 3-grutt as green as grass, f e C'f ranf sea s£c£. 
 
 Verbs: frufysjlucfett to breakfast, teefyteferttgen to 
 
 Particles: $or^au3 beforehand, corner fo/ore, fettsfcem 
 
 siwce, tDO-tt n whereof. 
 
 Obs. — Syllables of derivation and inflexion, attending 
 
 the fundamental or the modifying word, follow 
 
 the same rules of accentuation in compounds 
 
 as in simple words, as : ©artsen*tf)ur/ tytmmsete 
 fclau. 
 
 B. — The Subordinate, or Demi Accent ( s) rests — 
 
 On the determined component, or fundamental word, 
 
 as: Mxfcfyof churchyard, ©rofjkmtttfy generosity, £au3- 
 
 tfyur house door. 
 
 In compound particles, the fundamental word precedes 
 the modifying word, and has a very weak tone, as: 
 
 fytrt^fott henceforth, wo^ort whereof, Border before. 
 
 Exceptions. 
 
 The following words have the y^ZZ accent on the fun- 
 damental word: — 
 
 g 3 
 
66 ACCENTUATION. 
 
 a. Substantives : Safjr^unbert century, ©uW j! south 
 
 east, 9lort^We|t north west, SReU'fyollanfc) New 
 Holland, grofyn4etd)nam Christ's holy body. 
 
 b. Adjectives : letb-etcjen bond, fjanb^greifUd) ;?aZpa- 
 
 &/e, tiotkfommen perfect, vrilUfommen welcome, 
 fyofaaMiQ highly noble, §xo$zma&)t\Q high, potent, 
 a\Uma&)t\§ omnipotent (but illUmafyt), aU-tt?etfe 
 cZZ wise, atl^utig all good, aft-mdfylid) fo/ degrees. 
 
 c. Adverbs : compounded with all, tttel, ttoll, wofyl, 
 
 as : a\Ux)'\iX here, alUtixi but, alone, VkUkifyt 
 perhaps, tnel-mefyt rather, KoUzauf plenty, YOO^Uaxi 
 well then, tt?of)I-auf cheer up. 
 
 Of the Accentuation of the Compound Verbs 
 in particular. 
 
 ]. Verbs compounded with substantives or adjectives, 
 or derived from compound substantives, have 
 always the full accent on the first component 
 
 part, as: fyanb4)aben to handle, maintain, voofyxz 
 
 f ageu to foretell, luffctvattMn to walk for pleasure, 
 
 Ueb-fofen to caress. 
 
 In the verbs : lob-fitt^en to sing in praise, lob- 
 preifen to exalt, frof)4ocfen to exult, the accent is 
 frequently placed on the second syllable. 
 
ACCENTUATION. 
 
 67 
 
 The verb offen^baren, takes also the accent upon 
 the syllable baretL 
 2. Verbs compounded with particles have : — 
 
 a. The full accent on the particle, when this is 
 
 separable from the verb.* 
 
 b. On the verb, when the particle is inseparably 
 
 compounded with the verb, as : 
 
 Separably compounded : — Uttter^efyett to 
 perish, t?or-fd)laQCn to propose. 
 
 Inseparably compounded : — be^retfert to 
 
 prove, jer^retpen to tear. 
 
 The inseparable, and consequently unaccented prefixes 
 are: — 
 
 be/ as — hi'V0i\\zn, to prove 
 
 ent . . entscfyren, to dishonour 
 
 emp . . empsfangeri/ to receive 
 
 er . . . er^atteri/ to preserve 
 
 Winter . bintersgefjen, to deceive 
 
 oer, as — Dersgehen, to pass away 
 ooll . . Doll^tetyeti/ to execute 
 tutber . nribersrat&en, to dissuade 
 ger . . ger-ftreuen/ to disperse 
 mtf? . . miHaUen/ to displease. 
 
 Obs. — The particle mif? takes, however, the full accent in the 
 verbs : 
 
 nufMrauen, to distrust 
 nufj=gretfen/ to mistake 
 mifkirten, to degenerate 
 mipbktm, to underbid 
 mtf=t)<mbeln/ to do wrong 
 mifUriltngeri, to be dissonant 
 
 to be dissonant 
 
 mifj=lauten, 1 
 
 mif=tonen/ / 
 
 rm>ftimmert/ to put out cf hu- 
 
 mipUfyaQerit to dislike [mour 
 
 mif-gefr&reri/ to miscarry 
 
 mvp=oerjrefoen/to misunderstand. 
 
 * The separation takes place in the present and imperfect tenses, and 
 in the imperative mood, as : er fchlctgt mir $0X f he proposes to me ; er 
 [d)Iug mir neulid) s? o X, he lately proposed to me; 
 
68 
 
 ACCENTUATION. 
 
 The separable, and consequently accented particles 
 are : — 
 
 a b/ as- 
 
 - abslegen/ to lay off 
 
 fytn . 
 
 f)tn=brtngen> to take 
 
 an . . 
 
 . aiHiellen/ to place, 
 
 
 along 
 
 
 institute 
 
 tog . . 
 
 log=mfkn/ to tear off 
 
 auf . 
 
 . auf-get)en/ to rise, 
 
 mit . 
 
 mitsnefymen, to take 
 
 
 spring up 
 
 
 with one 
 
 auS . 
 
 . au64affem to leave 
 
 nod). 
 
 nacfysfolgen/ to follow 
 
 
 out. 
 
 
 after 
 
 bet. . 
 
 . bcisfte^en/ to assist 
 
 nteb er 
 
 nieber4egen, to lay 
 
 
 A 
 
 
 down 
 
 bat . 
 
 . bar=retd)em to offer, 
 
 
 
 
 present 
 
 ob . . . 
 
 ob-Iiegen/ to be incum- 
 
 
 A 
 
 
 bent on 
 
 ein. . 
 
 . etnsfaufen/ to buy in 
 
 
 
 
 A 
 
 fiatt . 
 
 jtattsfinben/ to take 
 
 fe$l • 
 
 . fetylsfcfolagen/ to mis- 
 
 
 place 
 
 
 carry 
 
 
 
 A 
 
 urn. . . 
 
 um=fommen, to perish 
 
 fort . 
 
 . fort=bauern, to con- 
 
 
 
 tinue 
 
 oor . . 
 
 oor=gebem to pretend 
 
 fret . 
 
 . fretsfpred&eti/ to acquit 
 
 meg . . 
 
 rcegsbtetben, to stay 
 
 9 le t d) 
 
 . gtetd)=!ommen/ to equal 
 
 
 away 
 
 
 A 
 
 ju . . . 
 
 §u=reben/ to encou- 
 
 fyetm 
 
 . f)eim*fefyren/ to return 
 
 
 rage. 
 
 i) e r . 
 
 . fyersbrtngen/ to bring 
 along 
 
 
 
 In the following compound particles, belonging to this 
 class, the accent is to be placed according to the general 
 rule of the accentuation of compound particles, upon the 
 second syllable of the particle : — 
 
 a n § c i m/ as — anfyeimsfteUeri/ to leave to one 
 b ab e t babei-jtefyen/ to stand by 
 

 ACCENTUATION. 
 
 better 
 
 . . bafyersfommen/ to come along 
 
 batytn. . .. 
 
 . . botjin^eilen/ to hasten along 
 
 b aoon . . 
 
 . . ba$on4aufeti/ to run off 
 
 einf) er . . 
 
 . . etntyersgetyeri/ to go about 
 
 etnpor . . 
 
 , . empor^eben/ to lift up 
 
 f)erab.. . . 
 
 . tyera&sfpringen/ to leap down 
 
 Ijeran ... 
 
 . Ijeransfutjren/ to lead on 
 
 fieraus. .. 
 
 . fyexau&fyoten, to fetch out 
 
 fyerbet ... 
 
 ♦ tjerbei=rufen/ to call towards one 
 
 tyeret n . . . 
 
 . f)emn=bunQen, to bring in 
 
 f)er uber . 
 
 . fyeruber=fommen/ to come over 
 
 t)cr urn .. . 
 
 . ^erum-laufen/ to run round (about) 
 
 fjerunter . 
 
 . fyerunter?faUen/ to fall down 
 
 fyeroor .. . 
 
 . tjeroor^bringen/ to produce 
 
 t)crju 
 
 . ijerju^etlen/ to hasten to one 
 
 uttifjer . . . 
 
 . umfyersgefyen/ to go about 
 
 umtjtn ... 
 
 . umt)in=!6nnen/ to forbear, help 
 
 o or a n. .. . 
 
 . »oran=gd)en/ to go before 
 
 oocaug. . . 
 
 . ootauMe^H/ to suppose 
 
 oorb ei . . . 
 
 . »orbei4ommerw to pass by 
 
 corner.. , 
 
 . oorfjer=fagen, to foretell 
 
 o orub e r 
 
 . corubersgefyn, to pass by 
 
 ub e r ein . 
 
 . uberein=lommen/ to agree 
 
 §ur ucf .. . 
 
 . jurMsrufeti/ to recall 
 
 §u[ammen 
 
 . jufammensfeleiv to put together. 
 
ACCENTUATION. 
 
 Observatio 
 
 a. Some verbs, beginning with an unaccented prefix, take 
 another accented particle before it, by means of which 
 the meaning of the root is modified a second time, as : 
 
 fennen to know, er=!ennen to recognise, an=er=!ennen to 
 
 acknowledge, fatten to hold, bi^alUn to keep, t» o r=be= 
 
 fatten to reserve. 
 
 Verbs of this kind are : ansoer=trcwett/ to entrust 
 
 ari4>e^treffen/ 1 
 an=be4angen; J 
 
 to concern 
 
 aufcer4>auen, to build up 
 aufsersjietyen/ to bring up, educate 
 QU6=er=lefen/ to select 
 au$-er=tt>ai)ien/ to choose. 
 
 b. The particles burd), fytnter/ u b e r> urn/ unter, 
 o o 11/ and to i e b c r, are in general unaccented before 
 verbs ; but they may also assume the accent, by doing 
 which the meaning of the verb is changed, as : — 
 
 burd)sb r t n g e m to penetrate ..bur d^brtngen, to force through 
 butrf)sb o r e n, to stab bur cfyzboren/ to bore through 
 
 uber^f u t) r e n/ to convict . » . . u b e r»fu^ren; to convey across 
 
 unter^i) a U e it/ to entertain . . u n t e r^alten/ to hold under 
 
 unter^g e t) e n, to undergo . . . . u n t e r-gef)en/ to perish 
 
 um-g e $ e m to evade u m*ge§en r to make a round about, 
 
 to have intercourse 
 
 roteber4 o I e n/ to repeat to i e b e r^olen/ to fetch back. 
 
ACCENTUATION. 71 
 
 Of Multi-Compounds. 
 
 Multi-compounds, or those compositions in which 
 either one of the component parts, or both, consist of 
 more than one word, as : ^aufmannSsfofyn, ^ttegS-fcfyaU' 
 plafe, $R\Uta§$zma§Ubtit, are accentuated according to 
 the following principles : 
 
 1. When the first component is a compound word, and 
 
 the second a simple one, the accent will be dis- 
 tributed thus : jtaufsmamubfofytt the son of a mer- 
 chant. 
 
 2. When the first component is a simple word, and the 
 
 second a compounded one, the accentuation will 
 
 be thus : itriegSsfdjau^pIafe the theatre of war. 
 
 3. When both components are compounds, the accen- 
 
 tuation is as follows : WliUta^ma^U^it dinner, 
 
 9lorb-fee-fd)tfF-fafytt the navigation of the North 
 Sea. 
 
 4. Syllables of derivation or inflexion follow the same 
 
 rules in multi-compounds as in simple words, as : 
 
 IBranb^ersfi'tersungg-an-fialt Fire insurance es- 
 tablishment. 
 
 Obs.—A few multi- compounds are irregularly accentuated, 
 as : Spalmsfonntag Palm Sunday, (Sfyarsfreistag Good Friday, 
 9teid)§4ofcratt) Counsellor of the empire, ©(fylomauptsmann 
 castellain, £)£>ers:poft=amt Chief post office. 
 
72 ACCENTUATION. 
 
 3. — The Accentuation of the Syllables in 
 Foreign Words. 
 
 Words taken from modern languages are generally 
 pronounced and accentuated as in the languages to 
 which they belong, or from which they are derived. 
 Thus, French words generally take the accent upon the 
 
 last syllable, as : Original, (^arbitral, SUtajejiat, 2Cbt>ofat, 
 
 problem, SSillet, ©erne, (Scatter, £iner, &c. 
 
 Greek and Latin words follow for the most part the 
 
 same rule, as : Sftatur, ^oftrtn, Manual, tyxalat, tyfyilofopfy, 
 
 VRan'oat, <&tatut, (Sfrft, ©tubent, %okxan%, Sujiij, ^uma^ 
 
 nttdt, Religion, &c. 
 
 There are also some original German words, but with 
 foreign terminations, which take the accent on the last 
 
 syllable, as: jtompan, ©cfyroabron, ©olbat, ©tatfet, 
 
 SBlumifl, SRoraft, ©lafur, ©tellage, &c. 
 
 A great number of foreign words, however, which have 
 been admitted into the language at an early period, and 
 assumed a German form, by either admitting a German 
 termination only, or changing at the same time the root 
 of the word, are accentuated according to the principles 
 
 of the German accentuation, as : Jtorper (corpus) body, 
 
 $)6bet (peuple) people, 93ufoer (pulvis) powder, gertjfer 
 
 (fenestra) window, %ht (abbas) abbot, ©ftjje sketch, &c. 
 
ACCENTUATION. 73 
 
 In polysyllabic words, which have assumed a German 
 termination, the full accent rests on the penultima, as : 
 
 t>te ^Pattifel the particle, bie (Spifobe the episode, ba$ 
 
 Qfrempel the example, bte Sb^Uc the idyl, &c. 
 
 This chiefly applies to adverbs, formed from foreign 
 
 words by means of the suffixes ifd) and lift), as : fyatmon- 
 
 ifd), tomanteifd), perfcm^tcfy, manier^ltd), &c. 
 
 In many words, the accentuation is entirely irregular 
 and variable, as : ^ifjor^e, Sfyeotie, ^Poetif, ^olttif, ^anon, 
 famine, SSatometer, Sfyermometer, trimeter, pentameter, 
 ^eyameter, iitax and max, ^allajl and tyaUa% 
 
 Others change the accent when increased by inflection, 
 as: doctor, £)octoren; spajior, ^aftoren ; 50lufe ; SJtotff, 
 Muffler, muftfalifd), s&totffant; 2Cet^er, dt^erffd) ; SIMobie, 
 melobtfd) ; Nation, national* 
 
 II. 
 
 THE ACCENTUATION OF WORDS. 
 
 The accentuation of words, or that stress by which 
 some words in a sentence (independently of their syllabic 
 accent) are distinguished above others, is partly regu- 
 lated by their grammatical, partly by their logical im- 
 portance. 
 
74 ACCENTUATION. 
 
 Thus, notional words (substantives, adjectives, notional 
 verbs, and adverbs of quality), being of greater impor- 
 tance than relational words (pronouns, auxiliary verbs, 
 numerals, prepositions, conjunctions, and adverbs, when 
 not adverbs of quality), are also distinguished by a greater 
 intensity of tone. 
 
 This rule is chiefly to be taken as a guide for the 
 accentuation of monosyllabic words, concerning which it is 
 moreover to be remarked, that monosyllabic relational 
 words have a weaker tone than dissyllabic ones, and that 
 the former are entirely slighted (unaccented), when 
 standing before or after one word, or between two words 
 
 of greater importance, as: am fizutt near the fire; et 
 
 fommt lie comes; 2Bag c§ dare; fommen ober $ef)en to come 
 or to go, &c. 
 
 Two or more consecutive monosyllabic form-words 
 are moreover not only to be uttered with an entire 
 absence of accent, but also with increased rapidity, as : 
 
 rapidly A 4o % u * rapidly 
 
 £m lannfl tfyn md)t besurtfyetlen, bcnn £>u f ennff tyn nicfyt ge= 
 
 nug, you cannot judge of him, because you do not suffi- 
 ciently know him, 
 
 Obs. The article ber/ Me/ ba$ f the, and ein a, in its monosylla- 
 bic forms, further the pronouns e§ it, and man they, people, as 
 well as the conjunctions fo and $x to, before the infinitive, are 
 always unaccented. 
 
 The stress which is to be laid in a sentence on one 
 notional word in preference to another, is decided by the 
 degree of their logical importance. The chief modifying 
 word in a sentence is therefore marked with a greater 
 stress, than the notional word or words which are modi- 
 fied or determined by the former. 
 
ACCENTUATION. 
 
 Thus, the predicate, as the modifying part in a sen- 
 tence, will take the chief accent, whilst the subject has 
 only a subordinate tone, as: £Mefe§ Staffer tjf etSfalt, 
 this water is as cold as ice. C?t fptett bte v^arfe wunber- 
 fcfyott, he plays beautifully on the harp. (£r ttfirb mtr 
 fcfyretfcen, /*e w?z7Z w?nfe to me. 
 
 From the same grounds the attributive adjective also 
 claims, inmost cases, the chief accent, as: (£x tjl em eblet 
 fSZenfd), he is a noble minded man, din Wcfyler^Ogner 
 Slftenfd) tt)trb nte ztwa$ UngejiemenbeS fagen, a well-bred 
 man will never say any thing unbecoming. 
 
 In sentences enlarged by objective cases, the latter 
 generally take the chief accent, as : £>et 83ebtente f)at ten 
 SSrief auf bte $) (i gebrad}t, £/*e servant has carried the 
 letter to the post office. 
 
 III. 
 
 THE ORATORICAL ACCENT. 
 
 As much to avoid monotony, and to enliven the 
 delivery of speech by a musical variety of tone, as for 
 the purposes of rendering speech more intelligible, the 
 logical relations of the different sentences, and of their 
 constituent parts in a period, are distinguished by a 
 corresponding modulation or raising and falling of the 
 voice. 
 
 The German language is eminently musical ; but as 
 example is a far safer teacher concerning the modulation 
 of tone in a language than precept, and the oratorical 
 accent being besides more a subject of rhetoric than 
 of pronunciation, we confine ourselves here to observe 
 
76 ACCENTUATION. 
 
 that, in general, the antecedent part (SSorbcrfafe) of a 
 period is distinguished by a gradual raising of the voice, 
 whereas the concluding sentence (3Rad)fafe) generally 
 requires a gradual descending of the same, as : — 
 
 gradual raising of the voice highest pitch 
 
 2?a6 itbtfdje Sebenggluct ijt/ trie tie (Srfafyrung unS lefyrt, roeber 
 
 gradual descending 
 
 bauertjaft/ nod) oollfommen/ all earthly happiness is, as ex- 
 perience teaches us, neither durable nor perfect. 
 
 The emphasis is that particular stress, laid upon a 
 word or syllable which the speaker wishes to point out 
 particularly. As it is entirely dependent on the inten- 
 tion of the speaker, it may fall on any, even the smallest 
 word, or a syllable in a sentence, as : 
 
 JD u bifl fur mid) 5 »er tjl w i & e r mid) ! thou art for me, 
 who is against me ! 
 
 Sdj t)aU tyn gefefyen, I have seew him. 
 
 3d) fyabe tfyn gefefyerv aber ntdjt feinen §8 ruber/ I have seen 
 him, but not his brother. 
 
77 
 
 EXERCISES ON THE ACCENTUATION. 
 
 N. B. Words which ought to be marked by the accent 
 of words, are distinguished in the printing. 
 
 ©em SBkifen MetUtl tie g&eid)t$&mer/ ten Stjoren be^err- 
 
 fcfyen fie. 
 £)ie S3efd)eibent)eit fyebt ben SBertfy ber anbern Sugenben. 
 £luale bid) ntd)t/ gu nuffen, voa& tit nid)tg nu$t. 
 <Sintrad)t ift bag jrdrttfe 33ant> ber ©efeUfdjaft. 
 £)ie 2f bf idjten be§ SEKenfdjen jnmmen oft nid)t mit fetnen 
 
 #anblungen uberein. 
 5Rid)t6 ift auf ber (Jrbe ofyne S8efd)roerlicf)feit. 
 
 To be Accentuated by the Student. 
 
 3d) erinnere (mid)) nidjt, bof ein 23ud), ein SJknfd), ober trgenb eine 
 I remember not that a book, a man, or any 
 
 2Segebenf)ett beg £eben$ fo grofiie SBirtungen auf mid) f)ersorgebrad)t 
 event of life so great effects upon me produced 
 
 t)dtte/ aU tie. f oftlidjen (Stucre/ bie td) burd) 3$re ©ttte ijabe 
 had as the precious pieces which I by your kindness have 
 
 lennen lernen. <Ste fdjeinen ein SSer! eineS t)immlifd)en 
 
 become acquainted with. They seem a work of a heavenly 
 
 h3 
 
78 ACCENTUATION. 
 
 ©emus ju feui/ ter fid) ten 3ttenfd)en ndt)ert ; urn 
 
 genius to be, who himself to men approaches in order 
 
 fie mtt fid) fclbjt ouf tie gettnbefte SBeife belannt §u 
 them with himself in the mildest manner acquainted to 
 
 macfyen. ©s ftnb feme ©ettcfyte. SWan gtaubt oor ten 
 make. They are no fictions. One believes before the 
 
 aufgefdtfagnen 23ud)ern be§ @d)icffal6 §u ftefyen, in benen tec 
 opened books of fate to stand, in which the 
 
 ©turmmtnt teg bemegteften £ebeng fauft/ unt mtt ©eroalt 
 whirlwind of the most agitated life howls and with violence 
 rafd) fytn unt nrieter- blattert. 
 rapidly to and fro turns the leaves. 
 
79 
 
 GENERAL DIRECTIONS FOR READING. 
 
 These observations are chiefly intended to serve as a 
 permanent guide to the student after he has completely 
 finished the perusal of the Treatise ; and as they not only 
 exhibit the most essential precepts, dispersed throughout 
 it under one retrospective view, but also point out to 
 the student the particular cases in which he will find 
 himself most likely to fail, we cannot too strongly 
 recommend, that, for some time at least, he should cast 
 a glance at them whenever he is practising in reading. 
 
 1. Every letter in a syllable is to be clearly and dis- 
 tinctly articulated, according to the sound, which has been 
 denned in the rules of the pronunciation, as : ^}^f e X fc>, 
 
 2. The initial and final consonants of the different 
 syllables of a word are to be articulated with peculiar 
 precision and acuteness, as thus only that distinct articu- 
 lation of each syllable is to be effected, which the German 
 pronunciation imperiously requires, as: ^>au6^!ned)t r 
 ZifyU^t, spofcpfetb, ©titcf, ©lucfSsjug, 
 
 Even in unaccented syllables of derivation and in- 
 flexion, although they are to be uttered with a very weak 
 tone and great rapidity, the articulation of the consonants 
 ought, at least, to be correct. 
 
 For instance, in the word jer^retfjen, the letter t of the 
 § {ts) is to be well marked, though the prefix §er is en- 
 tirely unaccented, and to be uttered rapidly. 
 
80 GENERAL DIRECTIONS 
 
 In tter-lteten, the sound of the & is to be decidedly that 
 of f, and not to be softened into that of the English v, 
 as: ferlieren (not verleeren, with the English v). 
 
 In biefem, the m is to be correctly sounded, however 
 weak and quick the syllable em is delivered. 
 
 The S, the t, and the x, in unaccented syllables, require 
 a particular precision, as: be§ ^er^enS ; e3 jemtmt; 
 grower et; ©ererte^re; ©ludS^ug* 
 
 The final syllable en alone admits of a certain indis- 
 tinctness and vagueness of sound, as : glttcf lid)^ e rt, 
 
 3. The accentuation is most scrupulously to be 
 attended to, it being, in fact, the chief medium by which 
 the true national colouring is imparted to the speech. 
 
 It will be recollected that the full accent rests in all 
 German words on the first syllable, except : — 
 
 1. In words beginning with the accentless prefixes : 
 
 be, ge, ent, er, tter, §er, emp. 
 
 2. Words terminating in et, or iren, have the full 
 
 accent on those terminations, as: ©pteleret, 
 fyaibiren. 
 
 3. Compound particles have the full accent on the 
 
 second syllable, as : um^et, fyerab. 
 For a few special anomalies, see the Treatise. 
 The demi-accent rests : — 
 
 1. On all suffixes, the vowel of which is not e, as : 
 #etkanb, ^eim-atf), $flonzat 
 
FOR READING. 81 
 
 2. On the fundamental word, or second component 
 part in compounds, as : (Sla^fenffcr, fce-f rant ♦ 
 Unaccented are : — 
 
 1. All syllables of grammatical inflexion, as: lieb- 
 
 enfc, #er^en$. 
 
 2. All prefixes, the vowel of which is e, as : 
 
 be^n?etfen, (Infc^fdtfuf?. 
 
 3. All suffixes, the vowel of which is e, as : $£ai\§z 
 
 cfyen, fcfymetd^ein* 
 
 4. The suffixes t$, fng, jtg, as: art-tg, triers ig* 
 Unaccented are, further: — 
 
 The articles t>er, fete, fc>a3, and ettt, the pronouns 
 e£ and matt, as well as the conjunctions fo and 
 §U, before the infinitive : — 
 
 <5r liebt tie Winter unb bte SSlumen, he loves (the) 
 children and (the) flowers. 
 
 <S§ ijl unnu§ ju II o gen/ it is useless to complain. 
 One, or two, or more consecutive little rela- 
 tional words, as well as all unaccented syllables 
 of derivation and inflexion, are not only to be 
 entirely unaccented, but also to be uttered with 
 increased rapidity, whilst the voice rests with a 
 full sound and strong emphasis on the radical 
 vowel of the next notional word, as : — 
 
 rapidly A 
 
 Qt t)at mtcf) nid)t gefefyen, he has not seen me. 
 
 rapidly 
 
 (Sine Sammlung t>on fctyon = eren ©e* vo a cf) fen 
 A collection of finer plants 
 
 rapidly 
 
 lann man ntcfyt f e fy en. 
 can one not see. 
 
82 GENERAL DIRECTIONS 
 
 4. Next to the accentuation, the sharp and long sound 
 of the vowels deserve the greatest attention of the 
 student. 
 
 A vowel is always sharp when followed by two or 
 more consonants in the same syllable (con- 
 cerning the peculiar nature of the §, see rule 7, 
 below) ; in all other combinations the vowels are 
 
 long, even in cases of elision, as : Ubt for lebet. 
 
 5. The vowels it, u, and 6, as well as the diphthongs 
 an, an, and eu, require a full and sonorous sound. 
 
 6. A proper discrimination is to be made between the 
 sounds of the a and a | d and e | e and 6 | and 6 
 o and n | u and u | t and h | te and ei | an and an \ an 
 and ei | ei and eu. 
 
 7. The f) ; which is strongly to be aspirated as the 
 initial letter of a syllable, is always mute in the middle 
 or at the end of a syllable, but lengthens the preceding 
 vowel, even when followed by another consonant, as : 
 
 8. The sound of the f must be well marked, chiefly at 
 the end. 
 
 9. The t> always like f* 
 
 10. The to like the French u, or between the English 
 v and w. 
 
 11. The sound of the t in the § (ts) must be well 
 marked. 
 
 12. The fd) always like sh. 
 
 13. The qu like the English kv, not like the English 
 kw or qu. 
 
FOR READING. 83 
 
 14. The sound of the $ is that of a pure sharp s, 
 without any admixture of the j. It is meant for a sharp 
 hissing sound (s) after a long vowel. 
 
 15. The r, which is more shrill than in English (pro- 
 nounce : $ett !), ought never to affect the sound of a 
 vowel preceding or following, that is : the articulation of 
 the latter is to be as pure and full before or after x f as it 
 is before and after any other consonant, as : rttfymen, 
 fur ; SRvfym, Utjeit ; £)f)t, SRofyr, Sftom ; Sloven, ©ef)or. 
 
 1 6. Particular attention ought also to be bestowed on 
 the articulation of the final g and d). 
 
 The final g has a guttural sound after a, 0, it, and au, 
 and a palatal one after e, i, d, 6/ and the other vowels 
 and diphthongs ; but both these sounds are to be ex- 
 tremely soft and smooth, as : Sag, bug, bog ; enrig, (Sieg, 
 SSeg, 3eug- 
 
 Whereas the sound of the final d), being also guttural 
 after a, 0, U, and an, and palatal after e, i, d, 6, &c, is 
 decidedly accute, sharp, and short, as : £)ad), $Rad)t, 
 Sod), £ud) ; £td)t, $ecfyt, roelcfyet* 
 
 Finally, we beg leave to remark, that it would prove 
 highly promotive to the student's ultimate success, if, when 
 reading, he would now and then repeat one and the same 
 sentence several times, and indeed, so often, till he should 
 find himself able to pronounce it as fluently as he would 
 in English; for thus the organs of speech will be formed, 
 the necessary fluency acquired, and the ear gradually 
 become familiarized with the oratorical accent. 
 
85 
 
 EXERCISES IN READING. 
 
 (Sinft trat ber Itebenbe ®entug ber gefufyl mcfyeren Sfllenfdjen uor ben 
 3uptter unb bat: // ©fitt Xtdjer SSatetv gteb betnen armen Sftenfdjen 
 etnc beffere ©prad)e/ benn ftc fyaben nur ffiSorte/ roenn fte fagen rcolien, 
 trie fte trauerri/ w>ie fie frofylocfen/ tote fte lieben." //.£a& tdj tfynen 
 ntdjt bte Sfyr&ne gegebeiv fagte Supttet 5 >/ tie Sfyrane ber greube 
 unb bte Sfyr&ne beg @d)mer§eg unb bte fufere ber £tebe?" £5er 
 (Sentug ant tr-ortete : „2Cud) bte Sfytdne fpricfyt bag £erj ntcfyt aug. 
 ©ott Ud)er SSater, gteb tfynen etne beffere (Spradje/ wemt fte fagen tr-ollen/ 
 nrie fte bte un enbltdje (Sefyn fud)t ffi&ten, — rate tfynen bag SD?orgen= 
 fterndben ber ^tnbijett nad) bltnft — unb bte Sftofen=aurora bcr Sugenb 
 nad)0lui)t— unb rate cor tfynen tm 2Ctter bag golbne #benb getrolf etneg 
 lunfttgen Sebengtagcg gl%nb unb §od) uber ber oerXornen (Sonne 
 fdjwebt. @teb tfynen eine neue @prad)e fur bag #er§/ metn SSater !" 
 3e£t i)6rfe Suptter in bem flange ber SSelten bte SKufc he^> ©efangeg 
 tyerannafyn, unb er nrinfre tfyr unb fagte : „$kty tytnunter ju fon SKen* 
 fdjen, unb lefyre fte betne ©pvadfte." ©a lam bte Sftufe beg ©efangeg 
 su ung fyernteber, unb letyrte ung bte S 6 n e J 
 
 3ean $auL 
 
86 EXERCISES 
 
 2. 
 
 2Me beutfcfye ©ptacfye. 
 
 Sic beutfdje (Sprad)e ift cine reine Ut fpradje/ bag fyeifjt : eine foXd;e/ 
 weldje auf leinc anbre fdjon bejrefyenbe begriinbet/ nod) con einer 
 fotdjcn abgeteitet ift, unb tatjer weber Saute/ SBSortet;/ nod) (Sprad) ge* 
 fe§e oon anbern ©prad)cn angenommen \)Qt. SDtefc urfprunglicfye unb 
 unoerdnberlid) befyauptete ©tammreinfyeit/ burd) n?cld)e fie fid) mefentitd) 
 oon ber SCRetyr gat)t ifyrer europaifdjen ©dytr-eftern unter fdjetbet/ ift alg 
 eine fefyr fyofje 33eoorgugung anjufc^n 5 benn in if)r ift tie unfdjdfcbare 
 (Sigenfdjaft einer (Spradje begriinbet : fowofyl in tfyrem ur fprungiidjen 
 £langgef)alt unb SSaue/ olS in tfjrcr ge(d)td)t lidjen (Snttricflung— ein 
 lebenbtgeg £en!mal bee 23otf g eigentfyitm tid)f eit barguftelten. 
 
 Ummanblungen ^ot bk beutfdje (Spradje allerbingg aud) im SSertauf 
 ber 3eit erfafyren 5 altein tt?efentlid)e SSer dnbrungen i^reS SSaueg/ ticf 
 eingreifenbe Umgeftattungen ifyreS Sautgefyalteg/finb nur augbem$ol!gs 
 leben fetbft ijeroor ge gangen 5 nicfyt burd) Sfcad) afymung frember (Sprad)s 
 wetfen/ nod) burd) ben (Sinfluf frember (Szwalt fyerbei gefutjrt roorben. 
 
 28at)rfyaft gu beflagen ift eg inbejj, bafj bte jteit nacfytfjettig auf 
 ben SSofyllaut berfelben etngercirft t)at; benn gletd)fam atg ware mit 
 bem erften frdfti^en 3ugenb alter ber germamfa>n ©t'&mmc aud) bte 
 frifdje, (ebenbige Jtraft beg <Sd)6nt)eitg.gefuf)leg entfdpunben/ t)at unfre 
 ©pradje nad) unb nad) immer gat)I reid)ere 2C& fdjroatf ungen an itjren 
 @nbft;lben erlitten/ unb anftatt mit ber geijttgen (Sntwicftung beg SSolfeS 
 cine reidjere SonfuUe gu entfatten/ eine oort)errfd)enbe £inneigung gu 
 tonlofer Serftadjung gegeigt. 
 
 23ie mit fid) tiefe SSer I ummerungen t$re§ £lang gefyatteg inbej? aud) 
 erftrec^t fyaben mogen/ fo bietet fie bod) beg 3Bot)Uauteg nod) immer 
 genug bar/ urn mit gdecfyt 2tnfprud) auf Sd)6ni)eit/ 2£nmutf) unb mufi!a= 
 lifdjen ©efyalt madjen gu Bonnen 5 unb ioem baran gelegcn fein burfte/ 
 fid) ndfyer Don biefer SSei)auptung gu iibcrgeugen/ ber burdjgefye nur bie 
 2Ser!e unferer gefeiecten £)td)ter 5 in iijnen n;irb er cine un erfd)6pflid}c 
 
IN READING. 87 
 
 gfille t>on etfd)uttemben Son fallen, oon malenben £lang firomungen 
 wcfyv nefymen. 
 
 3n ber Sfyat, tie ^a^lreidjen ©elbfts, Urn* unb £5oppeUauter unfrer 
 @prad)e btlben nod) immer etne Son letter/ wetdje bte fetnften 2tbftufungen 
 unb fcfyonften Sonfdrbungen entfyaltj tudfyrenb tie etgentl)umiid)e SSerMn* 
 bung unb 2Cn glteberung ifyrer SDittlauter/ fo trie bte @d)drfe unb 
 ©enauigfeit womtt ieber biefer £aute nad) feinem mafyren SBertfye 
 fyorbar gemacfyt nrirb, oorjttgttd) aber u)re un uber trefftidje/ fdjarfe unb 
 ftreng logtfdje 2tccentuirung/ bem rebnerifd)en 2Cu§ brucf berfetben etne 
 .Kraft unb S3efttmmt^ett rer ieifyen, weldje !aum oon irgenb etner anbern 
 ©pracfye uber troffen, oon roenigen nur erreid)t merben burften. 
 
 2Sorleud)tenb aber fte()t£)eutfd)lanbS ©pradje genrif rucfftd)tttd)tf)rer 
 SSilbungS fdfjigfeit unb gttgbarlett ia. ©eregelt unb ftreng in i^rer 
 @a| btfbung Ms jur mat^ematifdjen SSefttmmt^ett/ gejte^t fte nid)ts 
 befto trentger, rermoge ttjrer auSgebefynten Snoerfton^rettjett/ bin 
 rebnerifd)en unb poetifdjen 3wec?en etnen un enblicfyen ©pielraum §u 5 
 unb btefe regetmdf? tge Un gebunbentyeit it)rer SBort fugung/ oeretnt mtt 
 jener unfd)a§baren 33efdl)tgung : //neue SSegrtffe bloS burd) neue Sffiort* 
 oerbtnbungen §u be^eicfynen/" madjen fte in ganj oorjugltdjem ©rabe 
 geeignet/ jeben gegebenen ©toff mtt be number ungSrourbiger 2eid)tigfeit §u 
 bemdttigen/ unb bte fetnjten ©djatttrungen ber ©ebanfen unb ©efttyle 
 §u maten. 
 
 ®ujiat> SRagel. 
 
 3. 
 
 £)er j!erbenbe ©cfywatu 
 
 „ SMufj id) attetn benn ftumm unb gefang foS fetn ? " fprad) feufjenb 
 ber ftttle ©d)tt>an §u ftd) felbft, unb babete fid) im ©tang ber fd)6nften 
 3(benb rotfye , „ betnaf) id) altetn im ganjen SKetd) ber gefteberten 
 ©d)aaren. -toar, ber fd)n.atter-jben ©anS unb ber glutfenben £enne 
 unb bem lrdd)§enben spfau - bf neibe id) tfyre ©ttmmen md)t$ aber bir, 
 
88 EXERCISES 
 
 fanfte tytylomtUr beneibe tdfo fte/ menn id)/ mie fejtgefjalten burd) bicfetbc/ 
 tangfam meine SBellen jietje, unb mid) tm 2C6enb gtanj be§ .£tmmel§ 
 trunfen rermette. 2Bie motlte id) Mc^ ftngen, golbne ttbenb fonne ! bcin 
 fd)6ne$ Std)t unb meine ©eligfett ftngen/ mid) in ben (Spiegel beineg 
 SRofen antU^eS niebertaud)en unb fterben. 
 
 ©tin entsucf t taud)te ber (Sdjman nieber/ unb faum t)ob er fid) auS 
 ben SBetten wieber empor, al§ etne leud)tenbe ©ejtatt, tie am Ufer jlanb, 
 ityn gu ftdj lotfte. @S war ber ©ott ber 2Cbenb=/ unb Sfltorgen fonne/ 
 ber fd)6ne §)obu§. // £olbeS tteblidjeS SSefen/" fprad) er///bie SSitte tffc 
 bir gewafyrt, bie bu fo oft in beiner sec fdjwtegnen 33ruft nafyrtejt/ unb 
 tie bir nic^t efyer gewd^rt merben fonnte." £aum fyatti. er bo§ SSort 
 gefagt/ fo berufyrte er ben ©cfyman mtt feiner Sctcr unb fttmmte auf ifyr 
 ben Son ber Un fterbticfyen an. (Sntjucfenb burd) brang ber Son ben 
 SSogel 2Cpoifo's 3 aufgelofet unb ergoffen fang er in bie ©aiten beS 
 ©otteS bee <Sd)onf)eit 5 ban! bar frof) befang er bie fd)5ne ©onne/ ben 
 glangenben @ee unb fein unfdmtbtgeS/ fetigeS Ceben. ©anft/ n?ie feine 
 ©eftatt/ war baS f)armontfdje Sieb : lange SBSellen §og er ba^er in fufen/ 
 ent fd)lummernben S6nen/ bi§ er ftd) — in (Styftum mteber fanb/ am 
 guj? beg 2Cpotto in feiner warren/ f)immtffd)en (Sdjonfyett. Sec ©efang, 
 ber tt)m im £eben verfagt mar/ mar fein ©djwanen gefang gemorben/ ber 
 fanft feine ©lieber auftofen mufjte : benn er fyattt ben Son ber Unfterb^ 
 lidjen gefyort unb ba§ Wntlty etneS (§5otte6 gefefyn. ©anfbar fd)miegte 
 er ftd) an btn $uf 2CpoUo§ unb t)ord)te feinen gottlicfyen Sonen/ ai$ eben 
 aud) fein treueS SBeib antam, bie ftd) in fujjem ©efange tfym nad) 5U 
 Sobe geftagt. £)ie ©ottinn ber Unfdjuib nafym betbe §u ifyren gteb* 
 lingen an 5 ba§ fd)6ne ©efpann tfyreS SKufd&etwagenS; menn fte tm©ee 
 ber 3ugenb babet. 
 
 ©ebulbe bia^/ ftilleS/ tyoffenbeS v&er§ I SBaS bir im fieben rerfagt 
 ift/ meil bu eS nid)t ertragen fSnnteft/ giebt bir ber 2Cugenbtic£ beineS 
 Sobeg. 
 
 Berber* 
 
IN READING. 
 4. 
 
 £)et |>ant>fd)uf)* 
 
 25or feinem 26n>en garten/ 
 £a§ -ftampffpiel gu erwaiten/ 
 ©af £5nig §i*ans, 
 Unb urn 'tfn tie ©rof? en ber tone, 
 Unb ring§ auf t)ot)em SSalfonc 
 £)te £amen in fcfyonem £ran$. 
 
 Unb tme cr roinSt mit bem gingei'/ 
 2Cuf tt)ut fid) ber wette sJwtnger 
 Unb ^inein mit fceb&d)tigem <Sd)ritt 
 (Sin £6n?e trttt, 
 Unb fieijet fid) jiumm 
 SftingS urn/ 
 SMit langem @&f)nen, 
 Unb fd)uttelt bie 9)Ui)nen, 
 Unb jhrecft bic ©tieber, 
 Unb Xegt ftcf) nieber. 
 
 Unb bet £6nig nrinft nrieber/ 
 £)a offnet fid) fcefyenb 
 (Sin %mitz$ Sfyor, 
 SarauS rennt 
 SDttt ttritbem ©prunge 
 (Sin Siger fjereor. 
 SSte ber ben £6roen etfdiaut, 
 SSruUt er lout, 
 (Sdjldgt mit bem ©d)rceif 
 (Sinen fuvdjt baren Sfatf, 
 
90 EXERCISES 
 
 Unb retfet bte 3unge, 
 Unb im .ftretfe fdjeu 
 Umgefyt er ben £eu 
 ©rimmtg fdjnurrenb : 
 £)arauf ftrecft er fid) murrenb 
 3ur ©ettc nteber. 
 
 Unb bee £onig nrinft roteber, 
 25a fpett ba§ boppelt geoffnete #au§ 
 3met Ceoparben auf einmal au3/ 
 £5te fturgen mit mutt)iger Jtampf begter 
 2Cuf ba§ Siger tfyter 5 
 
 £)a§ pacft fie mtt fetnen grtmmtgen £a£en> 
 Unb ber Seu mtt ©ebrutl 
 S&cfitet ftd) auf — ba nrirb eS jittt. 
 Unb tyerum tm $ret£, 
 SSon SOZorb fudjt ijetf/ 
 Sagern ftd) tie graultd)en ^a^en. 
 
 £)a fdtft won be§ 2C(tan§ Stonb, 
 (Sin $anb fd)uf) eon fdjoner £anb 
 3«rifd)en ben Stger unb ben Seu'n 
 SKttten fytnein. 
 
 Unb au SRittcr £>etorgeS fpottenber 2Beif 
 SBenbet ftd) graulein -Kuntgunb : 
 // £err SKittcr/ tffc eure £ieb' fo fyeif / 
 fOSte ttyr mir'S fdjwSrt ju jeber (Stunb', 
 ©i fo t)ebt mtt ben £anb fd)u£) auf !" 
 
 Unb ber fitter in fdjnellem Sauf/ 
 ©tetgt t)tnab in ben fuvd)t ftaren finger 
 %Rit fejtem ©d)ritte, 
 Unb au$ ber Ungefyeuer SKtttc 
 ^immt er ben £anb fcfyufy mtt fecfem ginger. 
 
 ^ 
 
IN READING. 91 
 
 Unb mit (Srftaunen unb mit ©rauen 
 ©even's tie Slitter unb (gbet frauen/ 
 Unb gelajfen bringt er ben £anb fd?uf) juruc! . 
 Sa fdjallt tfym fein Soft aus jebem 5Kunbe, 
 2Cbet mit jartlitfjem SiebeS bticf — 
 (St oerfyeifjt itjm fein nafyeg ©tuc! — 
 (SmpfanQt ifyn grautetn £umaunbe. 
 Unb ber Slitter fid) tief oer fceugenb fprid)t : 
 ^ Sen San!/ Same/ begefyr' id) nid)t, " 
 Unb tterldfit fie sur fetben (Stunbe. 
 
 J. Weriheimer & Co., Printers, Circus Place, Finsbur.v Circys 
 
m -& w ' 2